1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
42 % for customized page headers/footers
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
45 % change header rule width
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
54 % the following added in Bahasa Indonesia Version
55 % to follow the most common style (centered chapters) in Indonesia
56 \addtokomafont{chapterentry}{\centering}
57 \addtokomafont{chapter}{\centering}
59 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
60 \use_default_options false
65 \maintain_unincluded_children false
67 \language_package default
72 \font_typewriter default
74 \font_default_family default
75 \use_non_tex_fonts false
81 \default_output_format default
83 \bibtex_command bibtex
84 \index_command default
88 \pdf_title "Petunjuk Penggunaan LyX"
93 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
94 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
95 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
100 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
101 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
104 \use_package amsmath 1
105 \use_package amssymb 1
106 \use_package cancel 0
108 \use_package mathdots 1
109 \use_package mathtools 0
110 \use_package mhchem 1
111 \use_package stackrel 0
112 \use_package stmaryrd 0
113 \use_package undertilde 0
115 \cite_engine_type default
119 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation indent
141 \paragraph_indentation default
142 \quotes_language english
145 \paperpagestyle default
146 \tracking_changes false
147 \output_changes false
156 Petunjuk Penggunaan LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 Petunjuk dalam Bahasa Indonesia ini disunting oleh
171 Apabila anda mempunyai komentar atau menemukan kesalahan yang perlu dikoreksi,
172 silakan kirim komentar ke mailing list LyX,
175 \begin_inset CommandInset href
177 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
199 \begin_inset Note Note
202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
203 Versi PDF terkini dapat diperoleh disini:
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
217 \begin_layout Standard
218 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
219 LatexCommand tableofcontents
226 \begin_layout Chapter
230 \begin_layout Section
234 \begin_layout Standard
235 LyX adalah suatu sistem pengaturan dokumen yang digunakan untuk menyiapkan
236 manuskrip makalah, buku, surat bisnis, proposal, juga dapat digunakan untuk
239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
247 LyX menggunakan paradigma bahasa perubahan sebagai inti dari gaya penyuntingan,
248 yaitu apabila anda menulis judul bab, maka anda hanya perlu menandainya
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
257 , tidak perlu menyatakan
258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
261 Huruf Tebal, ukuran 17
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 pt, rata kiri, jarak ke baris berikutnya 5
266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
274 LyX yang akan mengatur semuanya itu.
275 Anda hanya perlu memikirkan tentang isi dan konsep, bukan bagaimana pengaturan
279 \begin_layout Standard
280 Filosopi ini dijelaskan pada buku panduan
281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
293 Apabila belum membacanya, sangat disarankan anda membacanya terlebih dahulu
294 sebelum melanjutkan mempelajari buku panduan ini.
297 \begin_layout Standard
299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
310 , selain menjelaskan tentang filosofi LyX, juga menjelaskan tentang format
311 penulisan yang digunakan di semua buku panduan.
312 Oleh karena itu anda perlu meluangkan waktu untuk membacanya terlebih dahulu.
313 Buku panduan lain yang disarankan dipelajari sebelum membaca buku panduan
314 ini adalah buku panduan
315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
329 \begin_layout Section
330 Bagaimana Tampilan LyX
333 \begin_layout Standard
334 Seperti umumnya aplikasi program lain, LyX mempunyai kotak menu utama di
335 bagian atas jendela kerja.
336 Dibagian bawahnya ada kotak bantuan yang berisi satu kotak pilihan serta
337 berbagai tombol bantuan.
338 Selain itu, ada gulungan vertikal dan area kerja utama untuk menyunting
342 \begin_layout Standard
343 Ada satu hal yang perlu anda ketahui, anda tidak akan menemukan gulungan
345 Hal ini bukanlah karena kutu program atau fitur yang terlupakan, tetapi
346 merupakan kesengajaan.
347 Teks yang ditulis dalam area kerja LyX akan selalu diteruskan di baris
348 bawahnya apabila melewati batas jendela kerja.
349 Oleh karena itu, LyX tidak memerlukan gulungan horisontal, cukup menggunakan
351 Mungkin ada tiga alasan mengapa anda masih memerlukan gulungan horisontal.
352 Yang pertama adalah apabila anda mempunyai gambar yang berukuran besar.
353 Untuk mengatasi hal ini, yang anda perlu lakukan adalah mengatur skala
354 gambar di LyX agar bisa ditampilan seluruhnya di area kerja LyX.
355 Alasan yang kedua dan ketiga adalah berkaitan dengan tabel dan persamaan
356 yang melebihi area kerja.
357 Untuk tabel, anda bisa menggunakan tombol panah untuk menggeser kursor
358 dalam tabel pada arah horisontal.
359 Namun demikian, hal ini belum dapat dilakukan untuk persamaan yang panjang
360 dan melebihi area kerja.
363 \begin_layout Standard
364 Penjelasan ringkas tentang semua menu LyX serta tombol bantuan yang ada,
365 silahkan membaca di Lampiran
370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
372 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
377 Hampir semua menu dapat dipahami dengan sendirinya dari nama menu.
378 Namun demikian anda dapat memperoleh penjelasan lanjut pada sub-bab dalam
384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
386 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
394 \begin_layout Section
398 \begin_layout Standard
399 Bantuan yang disediakan adalah dalam bentuk buku panduan LyX.
404 buku panduan dalam LyX.
405 Caranya sangat mudah, dari menu
409 , kemudian pilihlah buku panduan yang ingin anda baca.
412 \begin_layout Section
414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
416 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
423 \begin_layout Standard
424 Ada beberapa fitur LyX dapat diatur dari dalam LyX, tanpa melakukan perubahan
425 atau menyunting secara langsung pada berkas konfigurasinya.
426 LyX mampu memeriksa sistem anda untuk melihat perangkat lunak, class dokumen
427 LaTeX, serta paket LaTeX yang tersedia.
428 Dengan kemampuan ini, LyX menggunakannya untuk menentukan pengaturan bawaan
434 \begin_inset Index idx
437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
444 Walaupun pengaturan konfigurasi bawaan sudah dilakukan ketika proses instalasi
445 LyX, anda masih mempunyai keleluasaan untuk menambah program tambahan secara
446 lokal, misalnya LaTeX class, yang sebelumnya belum dikenal oleh LyX.
447 Untuk memaksa LyX untuk memeriksa ulang sistem anda, maka anda perlu menggunaka
450 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_inset Index idx
457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
458 Konfigurasi Ulang LyX
464 Setelah proses konfigurasi ulang, anda harus menjalankan ulang LyX untuk
465 memastikan semua perubahan diterapkan dalam LyX.
468 \begin_layout Section
470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
472 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
479 \begin_layout Standard
480 Anda dapat menyunting dokumen dalam LyX tanpa instalasi LaTeX, namun demikian
481 anda tidak akan bisa melihat atau mebuat PDF atau mencetak dokumen tanpa
483 Apabila dokumen anda menggunakan DocBook, maka anda akan dapat menghasilkan
484 PDF atau yang setara, selain itu semua dokumen dalam DocBook akan mempunyai
485 keluaran sebagai plain text atau XHTML.
488 \begin_layout Standard
489 Beberapa class dokumen menggunakan kombinasi class LaTeX atau DocBook atau
491 Anda dapat menggunakan class dokumen tersebut walaupun anda tidak memiliki
492 berkas yang seharusnya sudah dipasang.
493 Tentu saja anda tidak dapat melihat hasil keluaran tanpa semua berkas terpasang
497 \begin_layout Standard
498 Semua paket LaTeX yang sudah dideteksi ada dalam sistem anda dapat dilihat
501 Bantuan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Apabila ada paket-paket yang belum terpasang, anda perlu melakukan instalasi
521 paket kemudian konfigurasi ulang (menu
523 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
531 \begin_inset Note Note
534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
535 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
543 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
544 More about TeX Code is described in section
549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
551 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
555 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
562 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
572 \begin_inset Index idx
575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
576 Konfigurasi Ulang LyX
581 Informasi tentang bagaimana melakukan instalasi tambahan paket LaTeX, silahkan
582 lihat sub-bab 5.1 dari buku panduan
584 Perubahan dan Pengaturan
589 \begin_layout Chapter
590 Bagaimana Menggunakan LyX
593 \begin_layout Section
594 Dasar Penggunaan Berkas
595 \begin_inset Index idx
598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
607 \begin_layout Standard
608 Semua penggunaan berkas dapat dimulai dari menu
612 serta ada di kotak bantuan dalam bentuk ikon tombol bantuan.
613 Beberapa menu yang berkaitan dengan berkas adalah:
616 \begin_layout Itemize
620 \begin_inset Graphics
621 filename ../../images/buffer-new.png
629 \begin_layout Itemize
643 \begin_layout Itemize
653 \begin_inset Graphics
654 filename ../../images/file-open.png
662 \begin_layout Itemize
668 \begin_layout Itemize
674 \begin_inset Graphics
675 filename ../../images/buffer-write.png
683 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \begin_layout Itemize
721 \begin_layout Itemize
727 \begin_layout Itemize
733 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_inset Graphics
740 filename ../../images/dialog-show_print.png
748 \begin_layout Itemize
754 \begin_layout Standard
755 Secara umum, hampir semua operasi berkas mirip dengan yang ada di pengolah
757 Hanya saja di LyX ada sedikit perbedaan.
758 Apabila membuka berkas baru dari The
760 Berkas\SpecialChar \menuseparator
762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
771 bukan hanya menuntun anda untuk memberi nama berkas tetapi juga memilih
772 templet yang akan anda gunakan.
773 Dengan memilih templet secara otomatis akan mengatur fitur utama tataletak
774 dokumen, sedangkan fitur lainnya dapat anda atur sendiri.
775 Templet mungkin menggunakan kelas dokumen tertentu (lihat subbab
780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
782 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
789 \begin_layout Standard
806 sangat berguna apabila anda bersama teman-teman anda menyunting berkas
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 Apabila anda akan melakukan hal ini, anda perlu mempelajari fitur Kontrol
813 Versi yang ditulis di buku panduan
832 akan memuat ulang dokumen dari cakra.
833 Anda dapat menggunakan operasi
841 untuk mengabaikan perubahan yang sudah anda lakukan dan mengembalikan ke
842 berkas terakhir yang anda simpan.
843 Dengan operasi berkas
851 anda dapat mendaftarkan catatan perubahan pada dokumen sehingga orang lain
852 akan dapat mengenali perubahan yang telah anda lakukan.
855 \begin_layout Section
856 Dasar Fitur Penyuntingan
857 \begin_inset Index idx
860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
869 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
876 \begin_layout Standard
877 Seperti pengolah kata modern lainnya, operasi penyuntingan dengan potong
878 dan tempel dalam LyX dapat dipraktekkan untuk teks, berupa karakter, kata,
879 maupun keseluruhan halaman atau bahkan lebih dari satu halaman.
880 Pada empat subbab berikut akan menjelaskan fitur penyuntingan yang ada
881 dalam LyX dan bagaimana memanfaatkannya.
882 Kita akan memulai dari potong dan tempel.
885 \begin_layout Standard
886 Seperti yang anda perkirakan, menu
890 dan kotak bantuan standar menyediakan perintah potong dan tempelkan serta
891 fitur suntingan lainnya.
892 Beberapa perintah suntingan perlu pembahasan khusus sehingga dikelompokkan
893 dalam pembahasan subbab berikutnya.
894 Perintah suntingan utama adalah:
897 \begin_layout Itemize
903 \begin_inset Graphics
904 filename ../../images/cut.png
912 \begin_layout Itemize
918 \begin_inset Graphics
919 filename ../../images/copy.png
927 \begin_layout Itemize
933 \begin_inset Graphics
934 filename ../../images/paste.png
942 \begin_layout Itemize
946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
956 \begin_layout Itemize
960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
966 \begin_layout Itemize
970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
980 \begin_inset Graphics
981 filename ../../images/dialog-show_findreplace.png
990 \begin_layout Standard
991 Tiga perintah suntingan yang pertama dapat dipahami dari nama perintahnya
993 Hanya ada beberapa catatan: apabila anda memilih dan menandai teks di dokumen
994 anda, maka secara otomatis akan tersimpam di papan klip.
1003 juga berfungsi sebagai perintah
1008 Selain itu yang paling penting, jika anda memilih dan menandai teks, harap
1009 hati-hati: jika anda menekan salah satu tombol, maka LyX akan menghapus
1010 teks yang anda pilih tadi dan mengganti dengan dengan huruf atau karakter
1012 Untuk mengembalikannya, anda perlu melakukan perintah
1016 agar teks dikembalikan seperti semula.
1019 \begin_layout Standard
1020 \begin_inset Index idx
1023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1029 Anda dapat dapat menyalin teks di LyX juga dari program lainnya menggunakan
1048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1063 akan menampilkan daftar teks yang terakhir anda tempelkan.
1066 \begin_layout Standard
1069 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
1071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1084 akan menyisipkan teks yang tersimpan di papan klip sedemikian sehingga teks
1085 yang disisipkan dalam
1090 Paragraf baru akan dimulai apabila ada baris kosong.
1095 , teks disisipkan sebagai paragraf baru, dimana setiap ganti baris menjadi
1099 \begin_layout Standard
1100 \begin_inset Index idx
1103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1110 \begin_inset Index idx
1113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1121 Suntingan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1140 akan membuka jendela dialog
1143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1153 Apabila anda sudah menemukan kata atau ekspresi yang anda cari, LyX akan
1155 Dengan menekan tombol
1159 , kata yang ditemukan tadi akan digantikan dengan teks yang ada di area
1165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1173 Anda bisa meneruskan pencarian dengan menekan tombol Berikutnya.
1174 Jika anda menekan tombol
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1186 maka semua kata yang ada di dokumen akan diganti seketika secara otomatis.
1190 \begin_layout Standard
1191 Apabila anda ingin mempertimbangkan huruf besar/kecil, anda perlu menggunakan
1194 Suntingan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1234 anda bisa mengatur pencarian yang anda inginkan.
1235 Apabila anda mengkatifkan pilihan
1238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1247 , maka pencarian kata
1248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1280 akan memaksa LyX hanya mencari kata tersebut, misalnya pencarian
1281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1292 tidak akan menemukan
1293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1307 LyX offers also an advanced
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1314 \begin_inset space ~
1319 feature that is described in sec.
1320 \begin_inset space ~
1324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1326 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1333 \begin_layout Standard
1334 Beberapa sisipan tambahan berformat, seperti nota, ambangan, dll., dapat
1336 Maknanya apabila tanda sisipan dihilangkan, maka isinya akan berubah menjadi
1338 Cara menguraikan sisipan tambahan adalah dengan meletakkan kursor di lokasi
1339 paling depan dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan tombol ketik
1343 atau meletakkan kursor di bagian akhir dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan
1351 \begin_layout Standard
1354 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1357 arg "inset-select-all"
1363 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1366 selects the whole document.
1369 \begin_layout Section
1370 Batalkan dan Kembalikan
1371 \begin_inset Index idx
1374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1381 \begin_inset Index idx
1384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1393 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1400 \begin_layout Standard
1401 Jika anda membuat kesalahan anda dapat dengan mudah membatalkannya.
1402 Anda perlu ke menu Suntingan
1404 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
1407 atau dari tombol bantuan
1412 \begin_inset Graphics
1413 filename ../../images/undo.png
1418 untuk membatalkan apa yang baru saja anda lakukan.
1419 LyX mempunyai kemampunyan menyimpan dalam kapasitas yang besar untuk membatalka
1421 Saat ini mekanisme simpanan maksimum adalah sampai 100
1422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1426 Apabila secara tidak sengaja anda melakukan proses pembatalan yang terlebih,
1427 anda bisa mengembalikannya dari menu
1429 Suntingan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1432 atau dengan menekan tombol
1433 \begin_inset Graphics
1434 filename ../../images/redo.png
1442 \begin_layout Standard
1443 Apabila anda mengembalikan perubahan sampai ke kondisi dokumen saat terakhir
1444 disimpan, status dokumen
1445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1452 tidak akan menjadi normal kembali seperti tidak ada perubahan.
1453 Hal ini karena anda sebenarnya melakukan perubahan pada dokumen.
1456 \begin_layout Standard
1465 dapat dilakukan untuk apa saja di LyX.
1466 Namun demikian proses
1474 pada teks tidak dilakukan untuk setiap karakter, tetapi berlaku untuk kumpulan
1478 \begin_layout Section
1480 \begin_inset Index idx
1483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1492 \begin_layout Standard
1493 Berikut ini adalah dasar pengunaan tetikus.
1496 \begin_layout Enumerate
1501 \begin_layout Itemize
1506 sekali di daerah jendela kerja LyX.
1507 Kursor akan mengikuti dan berkedip tepat di tempat anda menekan tombol
1512 \begin_layout Enumerate
1513 Memilih dan Menandai Teks
1517 \begin_layout Itemize
1522 kemudian seret tetikus.
1523 LyX akan menandai teks mulai dari awal kursor sebelum diseret sampai ke
1524 tempat posisi kursor setelah diseret.
1527 Suntingan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1530 untuk membuat salinan teks dalam simpanan LyX (dan papan klip).
1533 \begin_layout Itemize
1534 Pindahkan kursor ke tempat lain kemudian tempelkan teks yang disimpan ke
1535 lokasi baru, menggunakan
1537 Suntingan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1544 \begin_layout Enumerate
1545 Sisipan Tambahan (Catatan kaki, Nota, Ambangan, etc.)
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1554 pada sisipan tambahan untuk melihat propertinya.
1555 Anda perlu membaca pada bab tertentu di buku panduan ini untuk penjelasan
1560 \begin_layout Section
1562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1564 name "sec:Navigating"
1569 \begin_inset Index idx
1572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1581 \begin_layout Standard
1584 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1587 \begin_layout Itemize
1594 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1595 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1598 \begin_layout Itemize
1601 The `Outline', which is accessed either by the menu
1603 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1606 or by the toolbar button
1609 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1615 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1620 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1623 and use the same menu to return to them.
1624 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1627 \begin_layout Standard
1633 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1638 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1639 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1642 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1643 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1644 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1645 your last editing position.
1648 \begin_layout Subsection
1654 \begin_layout Standard
1657 The Outline was known in earlier versions of LyX as the
1658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1665 , since its original purpose was to display the document's table of contents.
1666 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1667 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1668 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1669 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1672 LatexCommand formatted
1673 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1677 ), or notes, or citations (see
1678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1679 LatexCommand formatted
1680 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1685 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1687 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1688 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1689 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1690 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1693 LatexCommand formatted
1694 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1698 ), or notes, or of citations (see
1699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1700 LatexCommand formatted
1701 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1706 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1710 \begin_layout Standard
1713 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline will in many cases open a context
1714 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1715 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1716 dialog and to modify the citation.
1717 Right-clicking a change will allow you to accept or reject it.
1721 \begin_layout Standard
1724 The `Filter' field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1726 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1727 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1735 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1738 \begin_layout Standard
1741 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1742 you further to control the display.
1747 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1748 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1753 option keeps it in the current view state.
1754 Keeping means that when you have e.
1755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1759 \begin_inset space \space{}
1762 the subsections of section
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1766 2 and 4 shown and click on section
1767 \begin_inset space ~
1770 3, the subsections of section
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1774 2 and 4 will still be shown.
1779 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1780 \begin_inset space ~
1784 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1794 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1801 \begin_inset space ~
1805 \begin_inset Graphics
1806 filename ../../images/reload.png
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1815 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1818 \begin_inset space \space{}
1822 \begin_inset Graphics
1823 filename ../../images/down.png
1825 groupId toolbarbuttons
1830 \begin_inset space ~
1834 \begin_inset space \space{}
1838 \begin_inset Graphics
1839 filename ../../images/up.png
1841 groupId toolbarbuttons
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1850 So, for example, you can move section
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1858 2.4 or after section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1865 \begin_inset Graphics
1866 filename ../../images/outline-out.png
1868 groupId toolbarbuttons
1873 \begin_inset Graphics
1874 filename ../../images/outline-in.png
1876 groupId toolbarbuttons
1880 (or the corresponding key bindings
1888 ) you can change the level of sections.
1889 So you can for example make section
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_layout Section
1905 Masukan / Melengkapi Kata
1906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1908 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1913 \begin_inset Index idx
1916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1923 \begin_inset Index idx
1926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1957 \begin_layout Standard
1958 LyX menyediakan data kata-kata untuk mempercepat proses penyuntingan dari
1959 hasil memindai kata-kata dalam dokumen yang sedang dibuka.
1960 Semua kata-kata yang ada dalam dokumen disimpan dalam basis data untuk
1961 digunakan melengkapi kata saat proses penyuntingan.
1964 \begin_layout Standard
1965 Pengaturan bawaan LyX untuk melengkapi kata adalah dalam bentuk yang paling
1966 sederhana yaitu menggunakan tampilan kursor segitiga sebagai tanda bahwa
1967 sudah ada kata tersedia.
1968 Anda tinggal menggunakan tombol
1972 untuk melengkapi kata.
1973 Apabila ada beberapa pilihan kata tersedia, jendela kecil akan muncul dan
1974 menampilkan kata-kata tersebut.
1975 Anda dapat memilih dengan menggunakan tetikus atau tombol panah, kemudian
1976 menetapkan pilihan dengan menekan tombol
1984 \begin_layout Standard
1985 Untuk menghilangkan tanda melengkapi segitiga, anda perlu mengubah pengaturan
1988 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1991 kemudian dari seksi Penyuntingan
1993 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
1995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2000 anda perlu melepaskan pilihan
2005 Sedangkan pengaturan
2007 Melengkapi kata otomatis pada baris
2009 , pilihan kata akan ditampilkan pada baris dibelakang posisi kursor.
2010 Untuk menerima saran kata yang muncul pada baris, anda cukup menekan tombol
2016 Apabila menggunakan pengaturan
2018 Menampilkan jendela pilihan otomatis
2020 , maka jendela pilihan kata akan selalu ditampilkan.
2021 LyX mempunyai berbagai pengaturan melengkapi kata untuk yang sudah mahir.
2022 Pengaturan lanjut akan dapat ditemui di subbab.
2023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2029 reference "sub:Input-Completion-Appendix"
2036 \begin_layout Section
2037 Gabungan tombol ketik
2038 \begin_inset Index idx
2041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2042 Gabungan tombol ketik
2048 \begin_inset Index idx
2051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 Gabungan tombol ketik
2067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Index idx
2083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2114 \begin_layout Standard
2115 Ada dua peta utama untuk gabungan tombol ketik: CUA dan Emacs.
2116 Bawaan LyX menggunakan CUA.
2119 \begin_layout Standard
2120 Beberapa tombol ketik, seperti
2123 \begin_inset space ~
2131 \begin_inset space ~
2152 , sudah dapat berfungsi seperti yang anda harapkan.
2153 Namun demikian beberapa tombol ketik mungkin perlu dipahami fungsinya.
2156 \begin_layout Labeling
2157 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2161 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2162 LatexCommand nomenclature
2164 description "Tombol ketik Tabulator"
2170 LyC tidak memfungsikan tombol ini sebagai hentian tab.
2171 Apabila anda belum memahaminya anda silahkan sekarang membaca terlebih
2173 \begin_inset space ~
2177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2179 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2186 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2191 \begin_inset space ~
2195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2197 reference "sub:Lists"
2203 Apabila anda masih merasa belum mengerti juga, mungkin anda perlu membaca
2211 \begin_layout Labeling
2212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2216 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2217 LatexCommand nomenclature
2219 description "Tombol ketik Escape"
2225 Tombol ini digunakan sebagai
2226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2233 Secara umum tombol ini memang digunakan untuk membatalkan penyuntingan.
2234 Buku petunjuk ini juga akan membahas lebih terperinci tentang pemanfaatannya.
2237 \begin_layout Labeling
2238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2244 \begin_inset space ~
2248 \begin_inset space ~
2259 akan memindahkan kursor ke bagian awal dari baris dan tombol
2263 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir baris.
2264 Jika anda menggunakan peta Emacs,
2268 memindah ke bagian awal berkas sementara
2272 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir berkas.
2275 \begin_layout Standard
2276 Ada tiga tombol ketik pengubah:
2279 \begin_layout Labeling
2280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2285 (Diseluruh buku petunjuk Disingkat dengan
2286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2298 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2299 LatexCommand nomenclature
2301 description "Tombol ketik Control"
2305 ) Tombol ini mempunyai beberapa fungsi, tergantung dengan tombol ketik lain
2306 yang dikombinasikan:
2310 \begin_layout Itemize
2319 , akan menghapus seluruh kata bukan hanya satu karakter.
2322 \begin_layout Itemize
2331 , akan menggerakkan kursor satu kata kekiri atau kekanan.
2334 \begin_layout Itemize
2343 , akan memindah kursor ke bagian awal dokumen atau ke bagian akhir dokumen.
2347 \begin_layout Labeling
2348 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2353 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2366 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2367 LatexCommand nomenclature
2369 description "Tombol ketik Shift"
2373 ) Tombol ini digunakan untuk menandai teks dengan tombol panah, dimulai
2374 dari posisi awal ke sampai berhenti menggerakkan.
2377 \begin_layout Labeling
2378 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2383 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2396 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2397 LatexCommand nomenclature
2399 description "Tombol ketik Alt atau tombol ketik Meta"
2403 ) Sebagian besar papan ketik mempunyai tombol Alt, hanya beberapa papan
2404 ketik yang menggunakan tombol Meta.
2405 Jika anda memiliki keduanya, anda harus mencoba untuk memastikan tombol
2406 yang benar-benar aktif sebagai
2411 Tombol ini memiliki berbagai kegunaan selain berfungsi sebagai tombol
2416 Apabila anda menggunakan dengan kombinasi huruf dibawah menu, berarti and
2417 memilih menu tersebut.
2421 \begin_layout Standard
2422 Misalnya, urutan menekan tombol
2423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2429 \begin_inset space ~
2433 \begin_inset space ~
2439 \begin_inset space ~
2443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2446 akan membawa anda ke dialog
2447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2462 \begin_inset space ~
2468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2478 \begin_layout Standard
2483 memberikan daftar berbagai kombinasi perintah yang dinyatakan dengan tombol
2492 \begin_layout Standard
2493 Anda akan banyak menemukan berbagai gabungan tombol ketik serta pintasan
2494 yang digunakan di LyX, karena setiap perintah gabungan akan menampilkan
2495 aksi yang anda lakukan serta pilihan gabungan tombol ketik lain yang bisa
2496 anda pilih di jendela status bawah.
2497 Notasi gabungan tombol ketik yang muncul akan mirip dengan yang digunakan
2498 di buku petunjuk, sehingga tidak membingungkan anda.
2499 Namun demikian untuk tombol Shift akan dinyatakan secara eksplisit, sehingga
2501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2516 diikuti dengan menulis huruf besar
2523 \begin_layout Standard
2524 Anda bisa melihat berbagai perintah gabungan melalui menu
2526 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2531 Penyuntingan\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2538 seperti dijelaskan di subbab
2539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2545 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2552 \begin_layout Chapter
2554 \begin_inset Index idx
2557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2566 \begin_layout Section
2568 \begin_inset Index idx
2571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2580 \begin_layout Subsection
2584 \begin_layout Standard
2585 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2586 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2587 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2588 numbering schemes, and so on.
2589 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2590 and format the title of your document differently.
2593 \begin_layout Standard
2598 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2599 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2600 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2601 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2602 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2605 \begin_layout Standard
2606 Read on for info about the document classes you can choose from LyX, and
2607 how to adjust their properties.
2610 \begin_layout Subsection
2612 \begin_inset Index idx
2615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2624 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2631 \begin_layout Standard
2632 You can select a class using the
2634 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2635 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2639 \begin_inset Index idx
2642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2649 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2653 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2657 \begin_layout Standard
2658 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2662 \begin_layout Description
2663 Article for basic articles
2666 \begin_layout Description
2667 Report for basic reports
2670 \begin_layout Description
2671 Book for writing a book
2674 \begin_layout Description
2675 Letter for US-style letters
2678 \begin_layout Standard
2679 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2680 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2681 will include many of these.
2682 Here are some of the classes.
2683 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2685 Special Document Classes
2694 \begin_layout Description
2695 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2698 \begin_layout Description
2699 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2703 \begin_layout Description
2704 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2708 \begin_layout Description
2709 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2710 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2711 There are three article layouts available.
2712 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2713 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2714 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2715 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2720 sequential numbering
2721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2724 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2725 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2726 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2727 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2730 \begin_layout Description
2731 Beamer Layout for presentations
2734 \begin_layout Description
2735 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2736 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one which is distributed
2740 \begin_layout Description
2741 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2744 \begin_layout Description
2746 \begin_inset space ~
2749 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2752 \begin_layout Description
2753 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2756 \begin_layout Description
2757 Foils Used to make transparencies
2760 \begin_layout Description
2761 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2762 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one which is distributed
2766 \begin_layout Description
2767 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2768 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2775 \begin_layout Description
2776 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2779 \begin_layout Description
2780 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2781 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2782 (Is used by this document.)
2785 \begin_layout Description
2786 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2789 \begin_layout Description
2790 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2793 \begin_layout Description
2798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2805 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2806 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2808 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2811 \begin_layout Description
2812 Slides Used to make transparencies
2815 \begin_layout Description
2817 \begin_inset space ~
2820 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2821 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2824 \begin_layout Description
2825 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2828 \begin_layout Standard
2829 We won't go into any detail about how to use these different document classes
2831 You can find all the details about the non-standard classes in Chapter
2837 Here, we will settle with a list of some of the common properties of all
2838 of the document classes.
2841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2845 \begin_layout Standard
2846 New users are sometimes puzzled by the fact that many of the document classes
2849 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2850 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2852 \begin_inset Index idx
2855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2872 Or they are surprised that, when they open e.
2873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2877 \begin_inset space ~
2884 template, they receive a warning saying that the document requires files
2885 that are not installed to produce output.
2886 So it seems that something is wrong.
2889 \begin_layout Standard
2890 But nothing is wrong.
2891 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2892 and some of them, like
2896 , are highly specialized.LyX tries to support as many different types of
2897 documents as possible, and it includes almost one hundred different layout
2898 files, with a growing number.
2899 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2900 by some document class.
2901 There are just too many of them.
2902 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as `Unavailabl
2907 e', you need to install the appropriate package files.
2908 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2909 document class for a new file.
2910 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2915 Installing new LaTeX files
2916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2923 manual for information on how to install them.
2924 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2932 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2934 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2935 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2936 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2938 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2941 \begin_inset space ~
2948 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2960 \begin_inset Index idx
2963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2972 \begin_layout Standard
2973 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2974 chosen document class.
2975 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2976 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2983 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2987 \begin_inset Index idx
2990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2997 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of the
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Some modules require LaTeX packages that are not always installed by default.
3003 LyX will warn you if you do not have the needed package.
3004 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3005 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3006 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing package.
3007 If you want to be able to produce output, then you need to install the
3008 missing package and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3010 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3014 \begin_inset Index idx
3017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3018 Reconfiguration of LyX
3024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3027 Installing new LaTeX files
3028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3035 manual for more information on installing needed packages.
3038 \begin_layout Standard
3039 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3047 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3048 LyX will advise you about these things.
3056 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3060 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3065 \begin_inset Index idx
3068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3069 Document ! Local Layout
3077 \begin_layout Standard
3078 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3079 used in a variety of different documents, and if you often find yourself
3080 needing the same sort of thing in different documents, you should consider
3081 writing a module for this purpose.
3082 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, and you
3083 find yourself wanting a specific inset or character style, but only that
3085 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3086 What you want is LyX's
3087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3103 manual for information on how to use it.
3106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3110 \begin_layout Standard
3111 Each class has a default set of options.
3112 Here's a quick table describing them:
3115 \begin_layout Standard
3116 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3124 \begin_inset Tabular
3125 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3126 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3127 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3128 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3129 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3131 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3585 \begin_layout Standard
3586 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3592 \begin_layout Standard
3593 You're probably also wondering what
3594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3598 \begin_inset space ~
3602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3606 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3607 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3612 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3617 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3627 headings, there are also
3635 headings, and so on.
3636 We'll describe these headings fully in section
3637 \begin_inset space ~
3641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3643 reference "sub:Headings"
3650 \begin_layout Subsection
3652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3654 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3659 \begin_inset Index idx
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3671 \begin_inset Index idx
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3683 \begin_layout Standard
3684 The most important properties of documents classes are set in the menu
3686 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3697 \begin_inset space ~
3702 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3704 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3705 to use for your document.
3706 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3710 \begin_layout Standard
3717 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3723 \begin_inset space ~
3728 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3729 You can choose between the following five options:
3732 \begin_layout Labeling
3733 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3738 Use default page style of current class.
3741 \begin_layout Labeling
3742 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3747 No page numbers or headings.
3750 \begin_layout Labeling
3751 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3759 \begin_layout Labeling
3760 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3765 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3766 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3767 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3770 \begin_layout Labeling
3771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3776 This allows you to create fully customizable headers and footers if you
3777 have the LaTeX-package
3782 \begin_inset Index idx
3785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3792 How they are defined is explained in section
3793 \begin_inset space ~
3797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3799 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3806 \begin_layout Standard
3807 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3808 \begin_inset space ~
3812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3814 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3821 \begin_layout Subsection
3822 Paper Size and Orientation
3823 \begin_inset Index idx
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3827 Document ! Paper size
3833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3835 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3842 \begin_layout Standard
3843 You'll find the following options in the menu
3846 \begin_inset space ~
3853 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3859 \begin_inset Index idx
3862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3871 \begin_layout Labeling
3872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3876 \begin_inset space ~
3881 What size paper to print on.
3885 \begin_layout Itemize
3891 \begin_layout Itemize
3901 \begin_layout Itemize
3907 \begin_layout Itemize
3913 \begin_layout Itemize
3919 \begin_layout Itemize
3925 \begin_layout Itemize
3931 \begin_layout Labeling
3932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3937 To choose whether to output as
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3959 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3962 \begin_layout Subsection
3964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3971 \begin_inset Index idx
3974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3981 \begin_inset Index idx
3984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3993 \begin_layout Standard
3994 Paper margins are set in the menu
3996 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4000 \begin_inset Index idx
4003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4012 \begin_layout Standard
4013 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings.
4014 Because KOMA-Script calculates then the printspace automatically by taking
4015 the paper format and the font size into account.
4018 \begin_layout Subsection
4022 \begin_layout Standard
4023 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4028 That includes the paragraph environments.
4029 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4030 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4031 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4032 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4041 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4043 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4044 will either need to create a new style yourself or else to convert these
4045 paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
4048 \begin_layout Section
4049 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4050 \begin_inset Index idx
4053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4054 Paragraph ! Indentation
4062 \begin_layout Subsection
4064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4066 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4073 \begin_layout Standard
4074 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4075 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4078 \begin_layout Standard
4079 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4080 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4081 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4082 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4086 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4092 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4093 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4094 language than English.
4095 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the used language.
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4100 and text — in fact, all of the spacings for just about everything are pre-coded
4102 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4103 LyX takes care of that.
4104 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4106 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4107 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4108 of a page, and so on.
4112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4113 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4118 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4119 LyX gives you the ability to globally change
4123 of these pre-coded spacings.
4124 We'll explain more later.
4127 \begin_layout Subsection
4128 Paragraph Separation
4129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4131 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4136 \begin_inset Index idx
4139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4140 Paragraph ! Separation
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 To separate paragraphs, select
4160 \begin_inset space ~
4167 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4171 \begin_inset Index idx
4174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4180 to indent paragraphs or add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4181 The size of the skips can be defined in the dialog, for the indentation
4182 you have to add this line to your document preamble:
4185 \begin_layout Standard
4195 \begin_layout Standard
4196 where length is a value in one of the units listed in Appendix
4197 \begin_inset space ~
4201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4203 reference "cap:Units"
4208 The default length is 30
4209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4215 \begin_layout Subsection
4219 \begin_layout Standard
4220 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4223 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4225 \begin_inset space ~
4230 dialog and toggle the
4233 \begin_inset space ~
4238 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4241 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4245 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4246 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4250 \begin_layout Standard
4251 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4252 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4255 \begin_layout Subsection
4257 \begin_inset Index idx
4260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4261 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4269 \begin_layout Standard
4272 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4276 \begin_inset Index idx
4279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4288 dialog you can set the line spacing in the submenu
4291 \begin_inset space ~
4300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4301 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4306 \begin_inset Index idx
4309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4310 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4315 installed to use this feature.
4323 \begin_layout Section
4324 Paragraph Environments
4325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4327 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4332 \begin_inset Index idx
4335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 Paragraph ! Environments
4342 \begin_inset Index idx
4345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4346 Paragraph environments|(
4354 \begin_layout Subsection
4358 \begin_layout Standard
4359 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4381 \begin_inset Newline newline
4384 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4385 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4386 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4395 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4398 \begin_layout Standard
4399 A paragraph environment is simply a
4400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4407 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4408 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4409 scheme, labels, and so on.
4410 Additionally, you can
4411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4418 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4419 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4420 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4421 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hold-overs from the
4422 days of typewriters.
4423 There are several paragraph environments which are specific to a particular
4425 We'll only be covering the most common ones here.
4428 \begin_layout Standard
4429 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4430 \begin_inset Graphics
4431 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4437 at the left end of the toolbar.
4438 LyX will change the environment of the
4442 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4443 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4444 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4448 \begin_layout Standard
4457 create a new paragraph using the
4461 paragraph environment.
4463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4470 because if you are in one of these environments:
4473 \begin_layout Itemize
4479 \begin_layout Itemize
4485 \begin_layout Itemize
4491 \begin_layout Itemize
4497 \begin_layout Itemize
4503 \begin_layout Itemize
4509 \begin_layout Itemize
4515 \begin_layout Standard
4516 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you hit
4520 , rather than resetting it to
4525 LyX will still reset the nesting depth, however.
4526 Usually, starting a new paragraph resets both the paragraph environment
4527 and the nesting depth (for more on nesting see section
4528 \begin_inset space ~
4532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4534 reference "sec:Nesting"
4539 At the moment, all this is context-specific; you're better off expecting
4544 to reset the paragraph environment and depth.
4545 If you want a new paragraph to keep the current environment and depth,
4549 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
4555 \begin_layout Subsection
4559 \begin_layout Standard
4560 The default paragraph environment is
4565 It creates a plain paragraph.
4566 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4567 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4568 this manual) are in the
4575 \begin_layout Standard
4576 You can nest a paragraph using the
4580 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4588 \begin_layout Subsection
4590 \begin_inset Index idx
4593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4612 for thanks or contact information.
4613 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4614 page along with today's date.
4615 For other types of documents, the title
4616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4623 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4627 \begin_layout Standard
4628 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4642 Here's how you use them:
4645 \begin_layout Itemize
4646 Put the title of your document in the
4653 \begin_layout Itemize
4654 Put the author name in the
4661 \begin_layout Itemize
4662 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4663 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4669 Note that using this environment is optional.
4670 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4671 If you don't want any date, add the line
4672 \begin_inset Newline newline
4682 \begin_inset Newline newline
4685 to the preamble of your document (menu
4687 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4693 \begin_layout Standard
4694 You can use footnotes to insert
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 or contact information.
4705 \begin_layout Subsection
4707 \begin_inset Index idx
4710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4726 \begin_layout Standard
4727 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4728 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4733 \begin_inset Index idx
4736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4737 Section headings ! Numbered
4745 \begin_layout Standard
4746 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4750 \begin_layout Enumerate
4756 \begin_layout Enumerate
4762 \begin_layout Enumerate
4768 \begin_layout Enumerate
4774 \begin_layout Enumerate
4780 \begin_layout Enumerate
4786 \begin_layout Enumerate
4792 \begin_layout Standard
4793 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4794 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4795 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4798 \begin_layout Standard
4799 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4800 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4801 You group the book into chapters.
4802 LyX does similar grouping:
4805 \begin_layout Itemize
4810 is divided in either
4821 \begin_layout Itemize
4833 \begin_layout Itemize
4845 \begin_layout Itemize
4857 \begin_layout Itemize
4869 \begin_layout Itemize
4881 \begin_layout Standard
4882 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4890 Not all document types use the
4894 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4899 is the top-level heading.
4907 \begin_layout Standard
4912 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4913 along with the number of the subsection, section, and, if applicable, chapter
4915 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4929 \begin_inset Index idx
4932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4933 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4941 \begin_layout Standard
4942 The unnumbered section headings have a
4943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4950 at the end of their name.
4951 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4952 the table of contents, see section
4953 \begin_inset space ~
4957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 Changing the Numbering
4968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4970 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4977 \begin_layout Standard
4978 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4979 in the Table of Contents.
4980 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4982 Certain classes start with
4996 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5006 This is something you can change.
5009 \begin_layout Standard
5012 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5018 \begin_inset Index idx
5021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5032 \begin_inset space ~
5036 \begin_inset space ~
5041 you'll see two counters.
5046 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5048 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5053 Short Titles of Headings
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5058 Section headings ! Short titles
5064 \begin_inset Argument 1
5067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5076 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5083 \begin_layout Standard
5084 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5085 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5086 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5087 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5090 \begin_layout Standard
5091 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5092 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5093 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5094 To specify a short title, use the menu
5096 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5098 \begin_inset space ~
5104 This will insert a box labeled
5105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5120 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
5121 This also works for captions inside floats.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5132 \begin_layout Standard
5133 The following information applies to all section headings:
5136 \begin_layout Itemize
5137 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5140 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5144 \begin_layout Itemize
5145 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5148 \begin_layout Itemize
5149 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5152 \begin_layout Subsection
5153 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5171 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5172 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5173 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5174 the text they contain.
5175 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5183 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5186 \begin_layout Standard
5187 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5196 when you start a new paragraph.
5197 So, you can type in that poem and merrily hit
5201 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5202 Of course, that means that, once you're done typing in that poem, you have
5203 to change back to the
5207 environment yourself.
5210 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5227 \begin_inset Index idx
5230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5239 \begin_layout Standard
5240 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5241 time for the differences.
5250 are identical except for one difference:
5254 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5263 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5266 \begin_layout Standard
5267 Here's an example of the
5280 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5282 See – no indentation!
5286 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5287 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5288 the other paragraph.
5291 \begin_layout Standard
5292 Here's another example, this time in the
5299 \begin_layout Quotation
5305 If I keep writing, you'll see the indentation.
5306 If your country uses a writing style that shows off new paragraphs by indenting
5307 the first line, then
5311 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5315 you were quoting other text.
5318 \begin_layout Quotation
5319 Here's a new paragraph.
5320 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5321 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5324 \begin_layout Standard
5325 As the examples show,
5329 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5330 They should put quotes in the
5335 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5339 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5342 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5348 \begin_inset Index idx
5351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5360 \begin_inset Index idx
5363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5379 \begin_layout Standard
5384 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5390 \begin_inset Newline newline
5393 Which I did not rehearse!
5397 It could be much worse.
5398 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5400 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5401 indented a bit more than the first.
5402 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 And make things look fine
5412 \begin_inset Newline newline
5418 arg "newline-insert newline"
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5429 does not indent both margins.
5430 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5431 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5438 arg "newline-insert newline"
5444 \begin_layout Subsection
5446 \begin_inset Index idx
5449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5465 \begin_layout Standard
5466 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5476 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5485 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5486 We'll present the individual details of each type of list next after describing
5487 some general features of all four of them.
5490 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5494 \begin_layout Standard
5495 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5497 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5506 reset the environment to
5510 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5511 The nesting depth is hereby kept.
5512 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5516 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5519 to break paragraphs.
5522 \begin_layout Standard
5523 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5524 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5526 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5527 you read all of section
5528 \begin_inset space ~
5532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5534 reference "sec:Nesting"
5542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5548 \begin_inset Index idx
5551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5567 \begin_layout Standard
5568 The first type of list we'll describe in detail is the
5572 paragraph environment.
5573 It has the following properties:
5576 \begin_layout Itemize
5577 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5581 \begin_layout Itemize
5582 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5585 \begin_layout Itemize
5586 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5590 \begin_layout Itemize
5591 The items can have any length.
5592 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5593 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5600 \begin_layout Itemize
5605 environment inside another
5609 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5613 \begin_layout Itemize
5614 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5617 \begin_layout Itemize
5618 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5621 \begin_layout Itemize
5623 \begin_inset space ~
5627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5629 reference "sec:Nesting"
5633 for a full explanation of nesting.
5637 \begin_layout Standard
5638 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5647 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5650 \begin_layout Standard
5651 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5652 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5655 \begin_layout Itemize
5656 The label for the first level
5660 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5664 \begin_layout Itemize
5665 The label for the second level is a dash.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5670 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5674 \begin_layout Itemize
5675 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5679 \begin_layout Itemize
5680 Back out to the third level.
5684 \begin_layout Itemize
5685 Back to the second level.
5689 \begin_layout Itemize
5690 Back to the outermost level.
5693 \begin_layout Standard
5694 These are the default labels for an
5699 You can customize these labels in the
5701 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5704 dialog in the submenu
5711 \begin_inset Index idx
5714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5723 \begin_layout Standard
5724 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5725 We'll explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5727 \begin_inset space ~
5731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5733 reference "sec:Nesting"
5740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5746 \begin_inset Index idx
5749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5758 name "sec:Enumerate"
5765 \begin_layout Standard
5770 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5771 It has these properties:
5774 \begin_layout Enumerate
5775 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5779 \begin_layout Enumerate
5780 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5784 \begin_layout Enumerate
5785 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5788 \begin_layout Enumerate
5793 environment resets the counter to one.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5809 \begin_layout Enumerate
5810 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5811 Items can have any length.
5814 \begin_layout Enumerate
5815 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5818 \begin_layout Enumerate
5819 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5822 \begin_layout Enumerate
5823 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5827 \begin_layout Standard
5836 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5837 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5844 \begin_layout Enumerate
5845 The first level of an
5849 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5853 \begin_layout Enumerate
5854 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5858 \begin_layout Enumerate
5859 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5863 \begin_layout Enumerate
5864 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5867 \begin_layout Enumerate
5868 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5873 \begin_layout Enumerate
5874 Back to the third level
5878 \begin_layout Enumerate
5879 Back to the second level.
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5884 Back to the outermost level.
5887 \begin_layout Standard
5888 Once again, you can customize the type of numbering used in the
5893 It involves adding commands to the LaTeX preamble (see the
5898 As stated earlier, such customization only shows up in the printed version,
5902 \begin_layout Standard
5903 There is more to nesting
5907 environments than we've stated here.
5908 You should read section
5909 \begin_inset space ~
5913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5915 reference "sec:Nesting"
5919 to learn more about nesting.
5922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5928 \begin_inset Index idx
5931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5940 \begin_layout Standard
5941 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5945 list has no fixed label.
5946 Instead, LyX uses the first
5947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5954 of the first line as the label.
5958 \begin_layout Description
5959 Example: This is an example of the
5966 \begin_layout Standard
5967 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5971 \begin_layout Standard
5973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5980 it is meant that the first hit of the
5984 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5986 If you need to use more than one word in the label use a
5994 arg "space-insert protected"
5999 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6000 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6002 \begin_inset space ~
6008 \begin_inset space ~
6012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6014 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6018 for more info.) Here is an example:
6021 \begin_layout Description
6023 \begin_inset space ~
6026 Example: This one shows how to use a
6029 \begin_inset space ~
6041 \begin_layout Description
6042 Usage: You should use the
6046 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6047 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6049 It's not a good idea to use a
6053 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6054 You're better off using
6066 paragraphs into them.
6069 \begin_layout Description
6070 Nesting: You can nest
6074 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6078 \begin_layout Standard
6079 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6080 them from the first line.
6083 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6089 \begin_inset Index idx
6092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6106 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6109 \begin_layout Standard
6110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6118 When you are using a KOMA-Script document class, like in this document,
6123 environment is named
6135 \begin_layout Standard
6144 environment has user-defined labels for each list item.
6145 There are the following properties of this list environment:
6148 \begin_layout Labeling
6149 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6154 labels LyX uses the first
6155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6162 of each line as the item label.
6167 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6168 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6169 blank as described above.
6172 \begin_layout Labeling
6173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6174 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6175 the body of the item text.
6176 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6177 label width plus a little extra space.
6181 \begin_layout Labeling
6182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6184 \begin_inset space ~
6187 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6189 If the label width is larger, the label
6190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6197 into the first line.
6198 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6199 margin of the rest of the item text.
6202 \begin_layout Labeling
6203 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6205 \begin_inset space ~
6208 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6213 environment have the same left margin.
6214 \begin_inset Newline newline
6217 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6220 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6222 \begin_inset space ~
6231 \begin_inset space ~
6236 determines the default label width.
6237 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6246 multiple times instead.
6247 The M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6256 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6259 \begin_inset space ~
6264 every time you alter a label in a
6269 \begin_inset Newline newline
6272 The predefined default width is the length of
6273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6282 \begin_inset Newline newline
6286 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6294 Setting the cursor into a list item to change only its label width will
6295 only change the width inside LyX but not in the output.
6303 \begin_layout Standard
6308 environment the same way like the
6312 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6318 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6322 \begin_layout Standard
6327 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6329 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6331 \begin_inset space ~
6335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6337 reference "sec:Nesting"
6341 to learn about nesting.
6344 \begin_layout Standard
6345 There is yet another feature of the
6349 environment: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item
6351 You can use additional
6355 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6360 are documented in section
6361 \begin_inset space ~
6365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6367 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6372 Here are some examples:
6373 \begin_inset Newpage pagebreak
6379 \begin_layout Labeling
6380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6381 Left The default for
6388 \begin_layout Labeling
6389 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6390 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6397 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6400 \begin_layout Labeling
6401 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6402 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6406 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6413 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6416 \begin_layout Subsection
6418 \begin_inset Index idx
6421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6430 \begin_layout Standard
6431 To use the features described in this section, you must load the module
6434 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6436 in the document settings.
6437 This loads the features of the LaTeX-package
6442 \begin_inset Index idx
6445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6446 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6454 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6455 Custom Enumerate Lists
6456 \begin_inset Index idx
6459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6460 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6468 \begin_layout Standard
6470 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6473 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6476 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6477 There you add the command
6480 \begin_layout Standard
6488 \begin_layout Standard
6489 in TeX Code (shortcut
6499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6500 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6501 \begin_inset space ~
6505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6507 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6520 is hereby the counter of the enumeration in the first level.
6527 outputs the counter as small Roman numeral.
6528 For capital Roman numerals replace in the command above
6541 For Arabic numerals use
6549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6556 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 You can only number 26
6582 \begin_inset space ~
6585 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6593 \begin_layout Standard
6594 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6595 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6598 \begin_layout Standard
6599 As example a list with custom numbering:
6602 \begin_layout Enumerate
6603 \begin_inset Argument 1
6606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6632 \begin_layout Enumerate
6633 \begin_inset Argument 1
6636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6659 \begin_layout Enumerate
6664 \begin_layout Enumerate
6665 \begin_inset Argument 1
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6692 \begin_layout Enumerate
6693 \begin_inset Argument 1
6696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6723 For this list these commands were used:
6726 \begin_layout Standard
6737 \begin_inset Newline newline
6745 \begin_inset Newline newline
6753 \begin_inset Newline newline
6763 \begin_layout Standard
6770 makes the label emphasized and
6779 \begin_layout Standard
6780 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6788 When you changed the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6789 lists until you change the definition.
6797 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6799 \begin_inset Index idx
6802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6805 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6813 \begin_layout Standard
6814 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6817 \begin_layout Enumerate
6818 \begin_inset Argument 1
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6840 \begin_inset Note Note
6843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 goes back to default numbering
6854 \begin_layout Enumerate
6858 \begin_layout Standard
6862 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6866 \begin_layout Standard
6867 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6872 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6873 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6876 \begin_layout Standard
6877 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6885 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6893 \begin_layout Standard
6894 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number than the
6896 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6897 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6898 of a normal new enumeration.
6899 There insert the command
6902 \begin_layout Standard
6908 \begin_layout Standard
6913 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6917 \begin_layout Enumerate
6921 \begin_layout Enumerate
6925 \begin_layout Standard
6926 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6929 \begin_layout Enumerate
6930 \begin_inset Argument 1
6933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6949 This enumeration starts at 4
6952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6954 \begin_inset Index idx
6957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6966 \begin_layout Standard
6967 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6969 For example the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6972 \begin_layout Itemize
6976 \begin_layout Itemize
6977 with standard spacing
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6981 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6983 There add the command
6987 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6990 \begin_layout Itemize
6991 \begin_inset Argument 1
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7013 \begin_layout Itemize
7017 \begin_layout Itemize
7021 \begin_layout Standard
7022 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
7028 \begin_inset Index idx
7031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7032 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7038 For more info see its documentation,
7039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7051 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to the one of the
7052 paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7056 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7059 \begin_layout Enumerate
7060 \begin_inset Argument 1
7063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7071 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7084 \begin_layout Enumerate
7085 with negative indentation
7088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7089 Further Customization
7090 \begin_inset Index idx
7093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7102 \begin_layout Standard
7103 You can also change the style of description lists.
7107 \begin_layout Standard
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 changes the description label font, the command
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7123 \begin_layout Standard
7124 sets the list style.
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 An example where the command
7131 \begin_layout Standard
7136 itshape, style=nextline
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Description
7145 \begin_inset space ~
7149 \begin_inset Argument 1
7152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7158 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7160 itshape, style=nextline
7170 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7171 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7175 \begin_layout Description
7177 \begin_inset space ~
7180 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7181 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7182 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7185 \begin_layout Standard
7186 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7192 \begin_inset Index idx
7195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7198 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7204 For more info see its documentation,
7205 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7214 \begin_layout Subsection
7216 \begin_inset Index idx
7219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7236 \begin_inset space ~
7244 \begin_layout Standard
7245 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7253 \begin_inset space ~
7259 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7260 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7261 In contrast, you can use the
7268 \begin_inset space ~
7273 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7274 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7278 \begin_layout Standard
7279 Of course, you're not limited to using
7286 \begin_inset space ~
7295 \begin_inset space ~
7300 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7301 some European academic papers.
7304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7308 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7315 \begin_layout Standard
7320 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7321 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7325 \begin_inset space ~
7330 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7331 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7332 Here's an example of each:
7335 \begin_layout Right Address
7337 \begin_inset Newline newline
7341 \begin_inset Newline newline
7345 \begin_inset Newline newline
7348 When is it? What is today?
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7355 \begin_inset space ~
7361 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7362 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7363 Here's an example of the
7370 \begin_layout Address
7372 \begin_inset Newline newline
7375 Where do I send this
7376 \begin_inset Newline newline
7379 Your post office and country
7382 \begin_layout Standard
7383 As you can see, both
7390 \begin_inset space ~
7395 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7400 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7406 This makes sense, since
7414 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7415 Thus, you have to use
7422 arg "newline-insert newline"
7428 \begin_inset space ~
7431 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7433 \begin_inset space ~
7442 menu) to start a new line in an
7449 \begin_inset space ~
7457 \begin_layout Subsection
7461 \begin_layout Standard
7462 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7463 or list of references.
7464 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7471 \begin_inset Index idx
7474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7483 \begin_layout Standard
7488 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7489 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7490 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7491 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7495 in anything else or vice versa.
7501 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7502 The book document classes ignores the
7506 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7510 in a letter document class.
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7518 environment does several things for you.
7519 First, it puts the centered label
7520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7528 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7530 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7531 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7532 the subsequent text.
7533 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7534 The appearance in the output depends on the used article or report class.
7537 \begin_layout Standard
7538 Starting a new paragraph by hitting
7542 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7543 The new paragraph will still be in the
7548 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7549 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7552 \begin_layout Standard
7553 \begin_inset Float figure
7558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7560 \begin_inset Graphics
7561 filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf
7568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7569 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7574 name "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7595 \begin_layout Standard
7596 We'd love to give you directly an example of the
7600 environment, but since this document is in the
7601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7608 class, we can't do this.
7609 We inserted it therefore as figure
7610 \begin_inset space ~
7614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7616 reference "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7621 If you've never heard of an
7622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7629 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7632 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7638 \begin_inset Index idx
7641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7650 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7657 \begin_layout Standard
7662 environment is used to list references.
7663 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7664 only use it at the end of the document.
7669 in anything else or vice versa won't work.
7672 \begin_layout Standard
7673 When you first open a
7677 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7693 depending on the document class.
7694 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7695 Each paragraph of the
7699 environment is a bibliography entry.
7704 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7705 Each new paragraph is still in the
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7713 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7714 by using a BibTeX database.
7715 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7716 phy handling, have a look at in section
7717 \begin_inset space ~
7721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7723 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7730 \begin_layout Subsection
7734 \begin_inset Index idx
7737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7738 Paragraph ! LyX code
7744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7758 environment is another LyX extension.
7759 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7764 key as a fixed whitespace;
7768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7780 \begin_inset space ~
7785 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7790 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7791 If you need to insert blank lines, you'll still need to use
7794 arg "newline-insert newline"
7811 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7812 So, when you finish using the
7816 environment, you'll need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7817 Also, you can nest the
7821 environment inside of others.
7824 \begin_layout Standard
7825 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7828 \begin_layout Itemize
7832 arg "newline-insert newline"
7835 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7840 \begin_inset space \space{}
7850 arg "newline-insert newline"
7856 \begin_layout Itemize
7860 arg "newline-insert newline"
7871 \begin_layout Itemize
7876 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7883 \begin_layout Itemize
7887 arg "space-insert protected"
7894 \begin_layout Itemize
7895 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7896 You must put at least one
7900 in any line you want blank.
7901 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7904 \begin_layout Itemize
7905 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7909 since that will insert
7914 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7917 arg "self-insert \""
7923 \begin_layout Standard
7927 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7931 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7935 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7939 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7943 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7944 printf("Hello World!
7949 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7953 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7957 \begin_layout Standard
7958 This is just the standard
7959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7970 \begin_layout Standard
7975 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7976 rc-files, and so on.
7977 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7978 as if you used a typewriter.
7979 \begin_inset Index idx
7982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7983 Paragraph environments|)
7988 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7991 Program Code Listings
8000 \begin_layout Section
8001 Nesting Environments
8002 \begin_inset Index idx
8005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8006 Nesting ! Environments
8012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8021 \begin_layout Subsection
8025 \begin_layout Standard
8026 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8028 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8030 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8032 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8044 \begin_layout Enumerate
8048 \begin_layout Enumerate
8053 \begin_layout Enumerate
8057 \begin_layout Enumerate
8062 \begin_layout Enumerate
8066 \begin_layout Standard
8067 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8068 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8071 \begin_inset space ~
8075 \begin_inset space ~
8083 \begin_inset space ~
8087 \begin_inset space ~
8096 menu to change the nesting depth of the current paragraph (the status bar
8097 will tell you how far you are nested).
8098 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8099 \begin_inset Graphics
8100 filename ../../images/depth-increment.png
8105 \begin_inset Graphics
8106 filename ../../images/depth-decrement.png
8110 or the convenient key bindings
8121 arg "depth-increment"
8127 arg "depth-decrement"
8130 to change the nesting level.
8131 The change will work on the current selection if you have made one (allowing
8132 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8136 \begin_layout Standard
8137 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8138 If it's invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8139 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8140 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8143 \begin_layout Standard
8144 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8145 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8147 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8150 \begin_layout Subsection
8151 What You Can and Can't Nest
8154 \begin_layout Standard
8155 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8156 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8159 \begin_layout Standard
8160 The question if nesting a paragraph environment is possible, is a bit more
8161 complicated than a simple yes or no.
8162 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8165 \begin_layout Itemize
8166 Completely unnestable
8169 \begin_layout Itemize
8170 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8174 \begin_layout Itemize
8175 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8179 \begin_layout Standard
8180 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8181 environments have them:
8184 \begin_layout Description
8185 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8186 Can't nest into them.
8190 \begin_layout Itemize
8196 \begin_layout Itemize
8202 \begin_layout Itemize
8208 \begin_layout Itemize
8214 \begin_layout Itemize
8221 \begin_layout Description
8223 \begin_inset space ~
8226 Nestable You can nest them.
8227 You can nest other things into them.
8231 \begin_layout Itemize
8237 \begin_layout Itemize
8243 \begin_layout Itemize
8249 \begin_layout Itemize
8255 \begin_layout Itemize
8261 \begin_layout Itemize
8267 \begin_layout Itemize
8273 \begin_layout Itemize
8280 \begin_layout Description
8281 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8282 You can't nest anything into them.
8286 \begin_layout Itemize
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 \begin_layout Itemize
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8310 \begin_layout Itemize
8316 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8328 \begin_layout Itemize
8334 \begin_layout Itemize
8340 \begin_layout Itemize
8346 \begin_layout Itemize
8352 \begin_layout Itemize
8358 \begin_layout Itemize
8364 \begin_layout Itemize
8368 \begin_inset space ~
8374 \begin_layout Itemize
8381 \begin_layout Standard
8382 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8390 Although it is possible to nest numbered section headings like
8399 \begin_inset space ~
8403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8407 \begin_inset space \space{}
8410 lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create
8411 well structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested
8412 section headings violate this.
8420 \begin_layout Subsection
8421 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8422 \begin_inset Index idx
8425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8426 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8434 \begin_layout Standard
8435 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8436 affected by nesting anyhow.
8440 \begin_layout Itemize
8444 \begin_layout Itemize
8448 \begin_layout Itemize
8452 \begin_layout Standard
8454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8462 Figures and tables in
8466 are not affected by this.
8471 Have a look at section
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8478 reference "sec:Floats"
8482 for more information about
8489 \begin_layout Standard
8490 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8491 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8495 \begin_layout Standard
8496 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8504 of its own, it behaves just like a
8505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8512 paragraph environment.
8513 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8518 Here's an example with a table:
8521 \begin_layout Enumerate
8526 \begin_layout Enumerate
8527 This is (a) and it's nested.
8531 \begin_layout Standard
8532 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8538 \begin_layout Standard
8540 \begin_inset Tabular
8541 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8542 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8543 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8544 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8628 \begin_layout Standard
8629 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8636 \begin_layout Enumerate
8638 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8642 \begin_layout Enumerate
8646 \begin_layout Standard
8647 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8650 \begin_layout Enumerate
8655 \begin_layout Enumerate
8656 This is (a) and it's nested.
8660 \begin_layout Standard
8661 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8667 \begin_layout Standard
8669 \begin_inset Tabular
8670 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8671 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8672 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8673 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8757 \begin_layout Standard
8758 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8764 \begin_layout Enumerate
8771 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8774 \begin_layout Enumerate
8778 \begin_layout Standard
8779 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8783 \begin_layout Standard
8784 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8786 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8789 \begin_layout Enumerate
8794 \begin_layout Enumerate
8795 This is (a) and it's nested.
8798 \begin_layout Standard
8799 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8805 \begin_layout Standard
8807 \begin_inset Tabular
8808 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8809 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8902 \begin_layout Enumerate
8904 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8912 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 \begin_layout Standard
8917 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8923 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8924 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8928 \begin_layout Subsection
8929 Usage and General Features
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8933 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8942 is the innermost possible depth.
8943 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8946 \begin_layout Enumerate
8947 level #1 – outermost
8951 \begin_layout Enumerate
8956 \begin_layout Enumerate
8961 \begin_layout Enumerate
8966 \begin_layout Itemize
8971 \begin_layout Itemize
8980 \begin_layout Standard
8981 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8982 both of them in the example.
8983 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8993 For example, if we tried to nest another
8998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9005 , we would get errors.
9008 \begin_layout Subsection
9010 \begin_inset Index idx
9013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9022 \begin_layout Standard
9023 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9024 We have several examples of nested environments.
9025 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9030 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9033 \begin_layout Labeling
9034 \labelwidthstring MMM
9035 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9044 \begin_layout Labeling
9045 \labelwidthstring MMM
9046 #2-a This is level #2.
9047 We created it by using
9050 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9056 arg "depth-increment"
9063 \begin_layout Labeling
9064 \labelwidthstring MMM
9065 #3-a This is level #3.
9066 This time, we just hit
9073 arg "depth-increment"
9077 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9081 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9087 arg "depth-increment"
9094 \begin_layout Standard
9099 environment, nested inside of
9100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9108 So, it's at level #4.
9109 We did this by hitting
9112 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9118 arg "depth-increment"
9121 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9126 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9142 \begin_layout Standard
9147 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9150 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9156 \begin_layout Labeling
9157 \labelwidthstring MMM
9158 #4-a This is level #4.
9162 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9165 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9170 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9174 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9179 keep nesting things inside
9180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9191 \begin_layout Labeling
9192 \labelwidthstring MMM
9193 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9198 \begin_layout Labeling
9199 \labelwidthstring MMM
9200 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9201 and this is level #6.
9202 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9206 \begin_layout Labeling
9207 \labelwidthstring MMM
9208 #5-b Back to level #5.
9212 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9218 arg "depth-decrement"
9225 \begin_layout Labeling
9226 \labelwidthstring MMM
9230 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9236 arg "depth-decrement"
9239 , we're back at level #4.
9243 \begin_layout Labeling
9244 \labelwidthstring MMM
9245 #3-b Back to level #3.
9246 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9250 \begin_layout Labeling
9251 \labelwidthstring MMM
9252 #2-b Back to level #2.
9257 \begin_layout Labeling
9258 \labelwidthstring MMM
9259 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9260 After this sentence, we'll hit
9264 and change the paragraph environment back to
9271 \begin_layout Standard
9272 We could have also used the
9288 environment in place of the
9293 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9297 Example 2: Inheritance
9300 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9301 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9304 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9313 arg "depth-increment"
9316 , after which, we'll change to the
9324 \begin_layout Enumerate
9329 environment, at level #2.
9332 \begin_layout Enumerate
9333 Notice how the nested
9337 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9341 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9345 \begin_layout Standard
9346 We ended this example by hitting
9351 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9355 and reset the nesting depth by using
9358 arg "depth-decrement"
9364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9365 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9374 \begin_inset Argument 1
9377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9378 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9386 \begin_layout Enumerate
9387 This is level #1, in an
9391 paragraph environment.
9392 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9396 \begin_layout Enumerate
9401 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9407 arg "depth-increment"
9411 Now, what happens if we nest an
9415 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9416 label be? An asterisk?
9420 \begin_layout Itemize
9430 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9431 So, its label is a bullet.
9432 (We got here by using
9435 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9441 arg "depth-increment"
9444 , then changing the environment to
9452 \begin_layout Itemize
9453 Here's level #4, produced using
9456 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9462 arg "depth-increment"
9466 We'll do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9471 \begin_layout Enumerate
9472 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9474 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9479 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9483 , because we are in the
9492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9511 \begin_layout Enumerate
9516 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9517 type of numbering does LyX use?
9520 \begin_layout Enumerate
9521 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9524 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9527 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9530 \begin_layout Enumerate
9534 arg "depth-decrement"
9537 to decrease the depth after the next
9540 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9547 \begin_layout Enumerate
9549 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9553 \begin_layout Enumerate
9555 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9556 numeral as the label.Why?
9559 \begin_layout Enumerate
9560 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9569 Notice, however, that LyX
9573 reset the counter for the label.
9577 \begin_layout Enumerate
9581 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9587 arg "depth-decrement"
9590 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9591 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9592 into the twofold-nested
9600 \begin_layout Enumerate
9601 The same thing happens if we do another
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9610 arg "depth-decrement"
9613 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9616 \begin_layout Standard
9617 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9622 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9636 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9642 The same rule applies for the
9646 environment, as well.
9649 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9650 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9653 \begin_layout Enumerate
9654 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9655 We won't nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into the
9656 same detail with how we did it.
9665 \begin_layout Standard
9673 arg "depth-increment"
9680 : level #2) We'll stick an encapsulated description of how we created the
9681 example in parentheses someplace.
9682 For example, the two keybindings are how we changed the depth.
9683 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9684 Either before or after this, we'll put in the level.
9688 \begin_layout Enumerate
9693 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9698 Now we'll add verse.
9699 \begin_inset Newline newline
9702 It will get much worse.
9703 \begin_inset Newline newline
9713 arg "depth-increment"
9724 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9725 \begin_inset Newline newline
9728 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9729 \begin_inset Newline newline
9735 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9748 \begin_layout Standard
9749 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9755 \begin_layout Standard
9757 \begin_inset Tabular
9758 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9759 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9760 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9761 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9850 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9860 arg "depth-increment"
9866 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9876 arg "depth-decrement"
9883 \begin_layout Enumerate
9888 : level #1) This is another item.
9889 Note that selecting a
9893 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9894 3 times to put the table inside the
9902 \begin_layout Quotation
9903 We're now ending the
9907 list and changing to
9912 We're still at level #1.
9913 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9914 The next set of paragraphs is a
9915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9929 \begin_inset space ~
9934 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9938 for the letter body.
9942 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9945 to preserve the depth.
9946 Remember that you need to use
9949 arg "newline-insert newline"
9952 to create multiple lines inside the
9959 \begin_inset space ~
9969 \begin_layout Right Address
9971 \begin_inset Newline newline
9974 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9975 \begin_inset Newline newline
9981 \begin_layout Address
9983 \begin_inset space ~
9989 \begin_layout Quotation
9990 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9994 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9995 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9996 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9997 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9998 as soon as possible.
9999 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10002 \begin_layout Quotation
10003 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10004 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10005 with your order, along with payment.
10008 \begin_layout Quotation
10009 We thank you again for your patience.
10012 \begin_layout Address
10014 \begin_inset Newline newline
10021 \begin_layout Quotation
10022 That ends that example!
10025 \begin_layout Standard
10026 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10027 just a few keystrokes.
10028 We could have easily nested an
10049 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10052 \begin_layout Section
10053 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10054 \begin_inset Index idx
10057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10066 \begin_layout Standard
10067 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10068 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10069 you more spaces: Spaces of different width and spaces which can or cannot
10070 be broken at the end of a line.
10071 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10075 \begin_layout Subsection
10077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10079 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10084 \begin_inset Index idx
10087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10096 \begin_layout Standard
10097 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10098 line at that point.
10099 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky linebreaks, like in:
10102 \begin_layout Quote
10103 Further documentation is given in section
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10110 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10118 \begin_layout Standard
10119 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10134 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10143 A protected space is set with
10145 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10146 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10150 \begin_inset space ~
10160 arg "space-insert protected"
10166 \begin_layout Subsection
10168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10170 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10175 \begin_inset Index idx
10178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10179 Spacing ! Horizontal
10187 \begin_layout Standard
10188 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10190 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10191 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10195 The length units are listed in Appendix
10196 \begin_inset space ~
10200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10202 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
10209 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10213 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10218 \begin_inset Index idx
10221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10222 Spaces ! Inter-word
10230 \begin_layout Standard
10232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10236 \begin_inset space \space{}
10239 English) have the typographical convention to add extra space after an end-of-se
10240 ntence punctuation mark, and LyX honors those conventions (see section
10241 \begin_inset space ~
10245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10247 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10252 Sometimes, you want a normal space nevertheless.
10253 In this case, insert an inter-word space (shortcut
10256 arg "space-insert normal"
10262 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10266 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10271 \begin_inset Index idx
10274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10283 \begin_layout Standard
10285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10292 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10301 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10302 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance
10303 inside abbreviations:
10306 \begin_layout Quote
10308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10312 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10315 \begin_layout Standard
10316 or between values and units.
10317 Compare for example this:
10318 \begin_inset Newline newline
10322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10326 \begin_inset Newline newline
10329 10 kg (normal space
10332 \begin_layout Standard
10333 You can insert thin spaces also with the menu
10335 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10336 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10338 \begin_inset space ~
10346 arg "space-insert thin"
10352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10356 name "sub:More-Spaces"
10363 \begin_layout Standard
10364 You can furthermore insert the following space types:
10367 \begin_layout Description
10369 \begin_inset space ~
10373 \begin_inset space ~
10376 space A line with a
10377 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10381 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10385 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10388 Negative thin space between the arrows.
10391 \begin_layout Description
10393 \begin_inset space ~
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10401 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10405 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10409 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10416 em) space between the arrows.
10419 \begin_layout Description
10421 \begin_inset space ~
10425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10429 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10433 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10437 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10441 \begin_inset space ~
10445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10448 em) space between the arrows.
10451 \begin_layout Description
10453 \begin_inset space ~
10457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10461 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10465 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10469 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10473 \begin_inset space ~
10477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10480 em) space between the arrows.
10483 \begin_layout Description
10485 \begin_inset space ~
10489 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10493 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10498 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10505 cm space between the arrows.
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10510 \begin_inset space ~
10514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10516 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10520 lists the different space sizes.
10523 \begin_layout Standard
10524 \begin_inset Float table
10529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10531 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10536 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10540 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10550 \begin_inset Tabular
10551 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10552 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10553 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10777 \begin_inset Index idx
10780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10790 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10791 in a uniform fashion.
10792 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10793 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10794 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10795 equally between themselves.
10799 \begin_layout Standard
10800 Here a few examples what you can do with them:
10803 \begin_layout Quote
10805 This is on the left side
10806 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10809 This is on the right
10812 \begin_layout Quote
10815 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10819 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10825 \begin_layout Quote
10828 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10832 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10836 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10842 \begin_layout Standard
10843 That was an example in the
10849 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10853 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10857 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10860 is one in a standard paragraph.
10861 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10865 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10868 \begin_layout Standard
10869 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10872 \begin_inset space ~
10877 in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10880 \begin_layout Standard
10882 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10886 \begin_inset space ~
10892 \begin_layout Standard
10894 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10898 \begin_inset space ~
10904 \begin_layout Standard
10906 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10916 \begin_layout Standard
10918 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10922 \begin_inset space ~
10928 \begin_layout Standard
10930 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10940 \begin_layout Standard
10942 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10946 \begin_inset space ~
10952 \begin_layout Standard
10953 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10961 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10965 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10966 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10967 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10971 option in the space dialog.
10979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10983 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10988 \begin_inset Index idx
10991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11000 \begin_layout Standard
11001 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11007 \begin_inset space \space{}
11010 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11013 \begin_layout Standard
11014 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11017 What is correct English?:
11018 \begin_inset Newline newline
11022 \begin_inset Newline newline
11026 \begin_inset space ~
11029 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11030 \begin_inset Newline newline
11034 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11045 \begin_inset Newline newline
11049 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11060 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11066 \begin_layout Standard
11067 So that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11072 \begin_inset space ~
11076 \begin_inset space ~
11080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11084 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11086 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11087 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11091 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11097 \begin_inset space ~
11101 \begin_inset space ~
11105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11108 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11117 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11118 That is why it is named
11119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11127 The normal phantom ouputs the width and heigth of the content as space,
11128 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11132 \begin_layout Subsection
11134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11136 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11141 \begin_inset Index idx
11144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11153 \begin_layout Standard
11154 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11156 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11157 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11159 \begin_inset space ~
11165 There you find the following sizes:
11168 \begin_layout Standard
11181 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11186 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11188 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11192 \begin_inset Index idx
11195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11196 Document ! Settings
11201 for the paragraph separation.
11202 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11213 \begin_layout Standard
11219 \begin_inset Index idx
11222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11228 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11229 An example: You have only two short paragraphs on one page with a vfill
11231 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11232 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11241 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11250 s are described in section
11251 \begin_inset space ~
11255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11257 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11266 If there are several
11270 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11271 You can therefore use
11275 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11278 \begin_layout Standard
11283 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11284 \begin_inset space ~
11288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11290 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
11297 \begin_layout Standard
11298 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 When the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11309 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11321 \begin_layout Subsection
11322 Paragraph Alignment
11325 \begin_layout Standard
11326 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11328 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11332 There are five possibilities:
11335 \begin_layout Itemize
11343 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11349 \begin_layout Itemize
11357 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11363 \begin_layout Itemize
11371 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11377 \begin_layout Itemize
11385 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11391 \begin_layout Itemize
11399 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11405 \begin_layout Standard
11406 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11407 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11408 the left and right margins.
11409 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11412 \begin_layout Standard
11414 This paragraph is right aligned,
11417 \begin_layout Standard
11419 this one is centered,
11422 \begin_layout Standard
11424 this one is left aligned.
11427 \begin_layout Subsection
11429 \begin_inset Index idx
11432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11433 Page breaks ! Forced
11439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11441 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11448 \begin_layout Standard
11449 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the pagebreaks in your document, you
11450 can force a page break where you want one.
11451 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11452 Only if you use a lot of
11456 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11460 We recommend not to use forced pagebreaks until the text is finished and
11461 until you have checked in the preview to see if you
11465 have to change the page breaking.
11468 \begin_layout Standard
11469 There are two types of pagebreaks: One that ends the page without any special
11471 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11473 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11474 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11476 \begin_inset space ~
11482 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11484 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11485 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11487 \begin_inset space ~
11492 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11494 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11495 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11499 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11500 at the top of a page.
11501 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11502 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11503 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11504 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11508 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11512 to learn more about
11519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11523 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11528 \begin_inset Index idx
11531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11532 Page breaks ! Clear
11540 \begin_layout Standard
11541 Rather than forced pagebreaks where the content behind the break is placed
11542 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11543 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11544 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed behind
11545 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11548 \begin_layout Standard
11549 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11551 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11552 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11554 \begin_inset space ~
11560 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11562 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11563 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11565 \begin_inset space ~
11569 \begin_inset space ~
11574 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11575 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11578 \begin_layout Subsection
11580 \begin_inset Index idx
11583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11592 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11599 \begin_layout Standard
11600 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: One that simply
11602 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11604 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11605 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11607 \begin_inset space ~
11611 \begin_inset space ~
11619 arg "newline-insert newline"
11623 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11625 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11626 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11628 \begin_inset space ~
11632 \begin_inset space ~
11637 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11639 This is necessary to avoid
11640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11647 in justified paragraphs due to whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11650 \begin_layout Standard
11651 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11652 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11653 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to actively
11654 set a line break, e.
11655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11659 \begin_inset space \space{}
11662 in a poem or for an address (see sections
11663 \begin_inset space ~
11667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11669 reference "sec:Quote"
11674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11676 reference "sec:Verse"
11681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11683 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11690 \begin_layout Subsection
11692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11694 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11699 \begin_inset Index idx
11702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11711 \begin_layout Standard
11713 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11724 \begin_layout Standard
11727 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11728 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11730 \begin_inset space ~
11735 you can insert horizontal lines.
11736 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11737 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11738 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11741 \begin_layout Standard
11743 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11754 \begin_layout Standard
11758 \begin_layout Section
11759 Characters and Symbols
11762 \begin_layout Standard
11763 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11764 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter e.
11765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11769 \begin_inset space \space{}
11772 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11780 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11784 for information on how this is done.
11787 \begin_layout Standard
11788 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11793 dialog via the menu
11795 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11796 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11802 \begin_layout Standard
11803 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11811 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11812 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11813 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11821 \begin_layout Section
11822 Fonts and Text Styles
11823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11825 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11832 \begin_layout Subsection
11834 \begin_inset Index idx
11837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11846 \begin_layout Standard
11847 There are two types of fonts:
11850 \begin_layout Description
11852 \begin_inset space ~
11856 \begin_inset Index idx
11859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11865 are fonts, built from outlines of the single glyphs (i.
11866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11870 characters) in the font.
11871 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11872 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11873 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11874 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11875 This means that outline fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11876 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11877 to provide a good image, it might be hard to provide a good rendering.
11878 \begin_inset Newline newline
11881 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11882 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11883 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11884 sizes than at small ones.
11885 \begin_inset Newline newline
11899 \begin_inset space ~
11907 \begin_layout Description
11909 \begin_inset space ~
11913 \begin_inset Index idx
11916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start, so they
11923 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11924 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11925 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11926 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in a
11927 picture manipulation program.
11928 In order to relieve this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11929 several fixed sizes typically from around 8 pixels high up to 34 pixels
11930 or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11931 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11932 to display each glyph, so bitmap fonts are thus faster displayed than scalable
11934 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11935 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11936 \begin_inset Newline newline
11939 Bitmap fonts are named
11942 \begin_inset space ~
11947 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11950 \begin_layout Standard
11951 The result of all this, is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they
11952 are designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11953 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11954 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11955 use scalable fonts.
11958 \begin_layout Standard
11959 To test which fonts are used in a PDF-document, you can have a look into
11960 its document properties.
11963 \begin_layout Standard
11964 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11965 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11966 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11967 font to emphasize text, you use an
11968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11976 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11977 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11981 \begin_layout Subsection
11983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11985 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11992 \begin_layout Standard
11993 Traditionally, LaTeX uses its own fonts.
11994 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11995 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11997 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11998 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11999 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited, compared
12000 to usual word processors.
12001 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12002 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12003 across different machines.
12004 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX was increased a
12005 lot meanwhile so that you can find packages for many free and commercial
12007 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12009 \begin_inset space ~
12013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12015 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12020 However, all others are available if you enter the respective LaTeX code
12021 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12025 \begin_layout Standard
12026 Furthermore, recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are
12027 also able to directly access fonts that are installed for your operating
12028 system (OS), namely XeTeX and LuaTeX.
12029 Both engines are now supported by LyX.
12030 By using them, you can use theoretically any OpenType or TrueType font
12031 that is installed on your system.
12032 The next section describes how to use these OS fonts.
12035 \begin_layout Standard
12036 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12044 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12045 es; so you might have to experiment.
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12054 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12062 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12063 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12071 \begin_layout Subsection
12072 Document Font and Font size
12073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12075 name "sub:Document-Font"
12080 \begin_inset Index idx
12083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12090 \begin_inset Index idx
12093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12102 \begin_layout Standard
12103 You can set the document fonts in the
12105 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12109 \begin_inset Index idx
12112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12113 Document ! Settings
12119 There you can specify which font should be used for the three different
12120 font shapes roman (serif),
12123 \begin_inset space ~
12135 \begin_layout Standard
12136 The possible options for the font include
12140 and a list of fonts available on your system.
12145 uses the standard TeX fonts, known as
12146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12152 \begin_inset space ~
12158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12171 European Computer Modern
12174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12193 are bitmap fonts, they often looks pixelated in PDF output, especially
12194 when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12199 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12202 \begin_inset space ~
12207 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12213 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12214 There are three ways to use one:
12217 \begin_layout Itemize
12221 \begin_inset space ~
12226 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12239 \begin_inset space ~
12244 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12248 as the default font.
12249 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12250 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12253 \begin_inset space ~
12266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12267 One difference is improved kerning.
12275 \begin_layout Itemize
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12288 fonts in (the rare) case that
12291 \begin_inset space ~
12296 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12311 Virtual means that it
12312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12323 -glyphs from other fonts.
12324 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12346 Loading the LaTeX-package
12351 \begin_inset Index idx
12354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12362 with the document preamble line
12363 \begin_inset Newline newline
12370 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12371 \begin_inset Newline newline
12376 will fix the guillemet problem.
12381 and that accented characters are not
12385 glyph, but build of
12389 characters, the accent and the letter.
12390 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12396 If you search for example for the French word
12397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12404 in a PDF, you won't get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches for
12406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12413 and not for the glyph
12414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12418 \begin_inset space ~
12422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12428 \begin_layout Itemize
12429 If you do not like the look of
12437 , you can of course select one of the other provided vector fonts, e.
12438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12442 \begin_inset space ~
12448 \begin_inset space ~
12460 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12461 \begin_inset space ~
12464 serif and typewriter fonts
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12469 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12476 \begin_inset space ~
12485 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12490 \begin_inset space \space{}
12498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12502 \begin_inset space \space{}
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12516 \begin_inset space ~
12526 , but you can also select your own.
12527 \begin_inset Newline newline
12530 The differences between roman,
12533 \begin_inset space ~
12542 fonts are explained in section
12543 \begin_inset space ~
12547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12549 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12554 \begin_inset Newline newline
12560 \begin_inset space ~
12565 was originally designed for newspapers.
12566 That means its glyphs are smaller than the ones from other fonts to fit
12567 into the small newspaper columns.
12571 \begin_inset space ~
12576 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12579 \begin_layout Standard
12580 For the font size there are four possible values:
12597 depends on your LaTeX-system, normally it is equal to the font size 10.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 The font sizes are the
12606 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12607 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12608 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12611 \begin_inset space ~
12617 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12618 \begin_inset space ~
12622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12624 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12631 \begin_layout Standard
12636 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12637 a font to display the script characters.
12641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12642 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12647 So this has no effect for the document language
12663 \begin_layout Standard
12664 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12676 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12680 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12681 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12682 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12684 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12687 dialog, see section
12688 \begin_inset space ~
12692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12694 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12706 \begin_layout Subsection
12707 Using Different Character Styles
12708 \begin_inset Index idx
12711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12718 \begin_inset Index idx
12721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12730 \begin_layout Standard
12731 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12732 certain paragraph environments.
12733 LyX supports two character styles,
12742 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12746 \begin_layout Standard
12751 style, do one of the following:
12754 \begin_layout Itemize
12755 click on the toolbar button
12756 \begin_inset Graphics
12757 filename ../../images/font-noun.png
12764 \begin_layout Itemize
12765 use the key binding
12774 \begin_layout Standard
12775 These commands are all toggles.
12780 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12783 \begin_layout Standard
12784 One typically uses the
12788 style for proper names.
12790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12797 is the original author of LyX.
12798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12804 \begin_layout Standard
12805 A more widely used character style is the
12810 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12817 \begin_layout Itemize
12818 clicking on the toolbar button
12819 \begin_inset Graphics
12820 filename ../../images/font-emph.png
12827 \begin_layout Itemize
12828 using the keybindings
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12842 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12843 es use a different font.
12846 \begin_layout Standard
12847 We've been using the
12851 style all over the place in this document.
12852 Here's one more example:
12855 \begin_layout Quotation
12858 Don't overuse character styles!
12861 \begin_layout Standard
12862 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12863 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12864 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12865 the common tendency to overuse character style.
12869 \begin_layout Standard
12870 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12878 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12880 \begin_inset space ~
12888 \begin_layout Subsection
12889 Fine-Tuning with the
12894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12896 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12901 \begin_inset Index idx
12904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12913 \begin_layout Standard
12914 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning, so
12915 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12916 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12917 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12918 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
12919 from ordinary dialog.
12922 \begin_layout Standard
12923 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
12924 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
12925 \begin_inset Newline newline
12928 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not well readable and
12929 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12933 To use custom character styles, open the
12935 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12937 \begin_inset space ~
12942 dialog or press the toolbar button
12945 arg "dialog-show character"
12949 There are several boxes on this dialog, each corresponding to a different
12950 font property which you can choose.
12951 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
12954 \begin_inset space ~
12959 , which keeps the current state of that property.
12964 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
12965 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
12966 environments in a snap.
12969 \begin_layout Standard
12970 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12985 \begin_layout Labeling
12986 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
12992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13000 The possible options are:
13004 \begin_layout Labeling
13005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13010 This is the Roman font family.
13011 Normally a serif font.
13012 It's also the default family.
13022 \begin_layout Labeling
13023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13027 \begin_inset space ~
13034 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13046 \begin_layout Labeling
13047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13054 This is the Typewriter font family.
13060 arg "font-typewriter"
13069 \begin_layout Labeling
13070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13075 This corresponds to the print weight.
13080 \begin_layout Labeling
13081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13086 This is the Medium font series.
13087 It's also the default series.
13090 \begin_layout Labeling
13091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13098 This is the Bold font series.
13111 \begin_layout Labeling
13112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13117 As the name implies.
13122 \begin_layout Labeling
13123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13128 This is the Upright font shape.
13129 It's also the default shape.
13132 \begin_layout Labeling
13133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13147 s the Italic font shape
13153 \begin_layout Labeling
13154 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13161 This is the Slanted font shape
13163 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13166 \begin_layout Labeling
13167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13171 \begin_inset space ~
13178 This is the Small caps font shape
13185 \begin_layout Labeling
13186 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13191 Alters the size of the font.
13192 You'll find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportio
13193 nal to the document font size.
13194 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13195 what you want to do.
13200 \begin_layout Labeling
13201 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13222 arg "font-size tiny"
13228 \begin_layout Labeling
13229 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13250 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13256 \begin_layout Labeling
13257 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13278 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13284 \begin_layout Labeling
13285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13306 arg "font-size small"
13312 \begin_layout Labeling
13313 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13327 It's also the default size.
13331 arg "font-size normal"
13337 \begin_layout Labeling
13338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13359 arg "font-size large"
13365 \begin_layout Labeling
13366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13387 arg "font-size larger"
13393 \begin_layout Labeling
13394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13415 arg "font-size largest"
13421 \begin_layout Labeling
13422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13443 arg "font-size huge"
13449 \begin_layout Labeling
13450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13471 arg "font-size giant"
13478 \begin_layout Standard
13483 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13484 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13485 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13486 — use that instead.
13487 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13490 \begin_layout Labeling
13491 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13496 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13501 \begin_layout Labeling
13502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13509 This is text with emphasize on
13512 This might seem like the same as
13516 , but it is actually a bit different.
13522 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13524 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13527 \begin_layout Labeling
13528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13535 This is text with Underbar on.
13541 arg "font-underline"
13547 \begin_inset Newline newline
13552 Avoid using underbar if you can! It's a hangover from the typewriter days,
13553 when you couldn't change fonts.
13554 We no longer need to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13555 It is only included in LyX because some people
13559 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13562 \begin_layout Labeling
13563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13567 \begin_inset space ~
13572 This is text with Double underbar on.
13576 arg "font-underunderline"
13580 \begin_inset Newline newline
13583 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13584 about double underbar.
13587 \begin_layout Labeling
13588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13592 \begin_inset space ~
13597 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13601 arg "font-underwave"
13605 \begin_inset Newline newline
13608 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13609 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13612 \begin_layout Labeling
13613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13620 This is text with Strikeout on.
13626 arg "font-strikeout"
13630 \begin_inset Newline newline
13633 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has since
13637 \begin_layout Labeling
13638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13645 This is text with Noun on.
13652 , this is a logical attribute.
13653 Normally it's equivalent to
13656 \begin_inset space ~
13665 \begin_layout Labeling
13666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13671 You can adjust the color of the text with this control.
13672 Notice that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13676 \begin_inset space ~
13681 , which is the default
13682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13689 and means normally black, you can choose between
13722 \begin_inset Index idx
13725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13734 \begin_layout Labeling
13735 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13740 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13741 the language of the document.
13742 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13744 \begin_inset Newline newline
13747 If you have for example a longer German Text in your document, LaTeX respects
13748 the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13749 When using the spell checking (see section
13750 \begin_inset space ~
13754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13756 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13760 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary
13763 \begin_layout Standard
13764 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13765 Once you've chosen a new character style via the
13767 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13769 \begin_inset space ~
13774 dialog, the settings are saved.
13775 You can activate them using the toolbar button
13778 arg "textstyle-apply"
13782 The button lets you toggle the state of your custom character style even
13783 when the dialog isn't visible.
13787 \begin_layout Standard
13788 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13795 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13796 (suppose you just set the shape to
13797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13815 \begin_inset space ~
13827 \begin_layout Standard
13828 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
13836 \begin_inset space ~
13848 \begin_layout Itemize
13854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13861 font, that means every character has the same width, the
13862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13879 \begin_inset Newline newline
13883 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13897 \begin_inset Note Note
13900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13901 For more on phantoms see section
13902 \begin_inset space ~
13906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13908 reference "sub:More-Spaces"
13918 \begin_inset Newline newline
13924 \begin_layout Itemize
13929 fonts use characters with serifs.
13930 These are the small
13931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13938 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
13939 The following example will show the difference:
13940 \begin_inset Newline newline
13944 \begin_inset Newline newline
13949 text without serifs
13952 \begin_inset Newline newline
13955 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
13956 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
13963 \begin_layout Itemize
13969 This font type is therefore often used for headings and short texts.
13970 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
13973 \begin_layout Standard
13974 We conclude with the same warning once again: Don't overuse the fonts.
13975 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
13978 \begin_layout Section
13979 Printing and Previewing
13982 \begin_layout Subsection
13986 \begin_layout Standard
13987 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
13988 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
13989 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
13990 goes on behind-the-scenes.
13991 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
13993 Additional Features
13998 \begin_layout Standard
13999 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14000 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14001 confusion, we'll only refer to LaTeX.
14002 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14003 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14004 This happens in two stages:
14007 \begin_layout Enumerate
14008 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14009 generating a file with the extension,
14010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14024 \begin_layout Enumerate
14025 Next, LaTeX uses the commands in the
14029 file to produce printable output.
14033 \begin_layout Subsection
14034 Output file formats
14035 \begin_inset Index idx
14038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14047 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14056 \begin_inset Index idx
14059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14060 File formats ! ASCII
14068 \begin_layout Standard
14069 This file type has the extension
14070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14082 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14086 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14093 \begin_layout Standard
14094 You can export your document to ASCII by the menu
14096 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14097 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14103 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14105 \begin_inset Index idx
14108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14109 File formats ! LaTeX
14117 \begin_layout Standard
14118 This file type has the extension
14119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14130 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14132 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14133 it manually with console commands.
14134 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14135 you view or export your document.
14138 \begin_layout Standard
14139 You can export your document as LaTeX-file using the menu
14141 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14142 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14161 \begin_inset Index idx
14164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14173 \begin_layout Standard
14174 This file type has the extension
14175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14195 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14196 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14197 DVIs are used for quick previews and as pre-stage for other output formats,
14201 \begin_layout Standard
14202 DVI files do not contain images, they only link them.
14203 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14204 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the image in the background to make
14205 it visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer when
14207 So we recommend to use PDF for files with many images.
14210 \begin_layout Standard
14211 You can export your document to DVI by the menu
14213 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14214 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14222 \begin_inset Index idx
14225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14226 File formats ! PostScript
14234 \begin_layout Standard
14235 This file type has the extension
14236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14248 PostScript was developed by the company
14252 as a printer language.
14253 The file contains therefore commands that the printer uses to print the
14255 PostScript can be seen as a
14256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14259 programming language
14260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14263 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14268 When you are interested to learn more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-packa
14274 \begin_inset Index idx
14277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14278 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14288 Due to this ability, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14291 \begin_layout Standard
14292 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14296 Encapsulated PostScript
14297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14300 (EPS, file extension
14301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14313 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14314 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14319 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14323 conversions whenever you view or export your document.
14324 This will slow down your workflow with LyX drastically.
14325 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14326 EPS to avoid this problem.
14329 \begin_layout Standard
14330 You can export your document to PostScript using the menu
14332 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14333 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14341 \begin_inset Index idx
14344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14351 \begin_inset Index idx
14354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14363 \begin_layout Standard
14364 This file type has the extension
14365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14381 Portable Document Format
14382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14389 was derived from PostScript.
14390 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14399 implies, it can be processed at any computer system and the printed output
14400 looks exactly the same.
14403 \begin_layout Standard
14404 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14408 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14412 (JPG, file extension
14413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14440 Portable Network Graphics
14441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14444 (PNG, file extension
14445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14457 You can although use any other image format, because LyX converts them
14458 in the background to one of these formats.
14459 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14460 will slow down your workflow.
14461 So we recommend to use images in one of the three mentioned formats.
14464 \begin_layout Standard
14465 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14467 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14470 in three different ways:
14473 \begin_layout Description
14474 PDF This uses the program
14478 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14479 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14483 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14484 So this export variant consist of three conversions.
14487 \begin_layout Description
14489 \begin_inset space ~
14492 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14496 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14500 \begin_layout Description
14502 \begin_inset space ~
14505 (pdflatex) This uses the program pdftex that converts your file directly
14509 \begin_layout Description
14511 \begin_inset space ~
14518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14525 X) This uses the program XeTeX that converts your file directly to PDF.
14526 XeTeX is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support
14527 for direct font access (see section
14528 \begin_inset space ~
14532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14534 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14539 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts.
14542 \begin_layout Description
14544 \begin_inset space ~
14551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14558 X) This uses the program LuaTeX that converts your file directly to PDF.
14559 LuaTeX is an even newer engine, derived from pdflatex, that also provides
14560 direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
14561 \begin_inset space ~
14565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14567 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14572 LuaTeX is still work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
14576 \begin_layout Standard
14577 We recommend to use
14580 \begin_inset space ~
14589 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14590 works without problems.
14595 is no longer under development and therefore a bit outdated.
14598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14600 \begin_inset Index idx
14603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14604 FileFormats ! XHTML
14610 \begin_inset Index idx
14613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14622 \begin_layout Standard
14623 This file type has the extension
14624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14636 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
14637 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links them, and
14638 when LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
14639 suitable for the purpose.
14640 Math is output as MathML, which renders nicely in browsers that support
14641 it, but not all do.
14644 \begin_layout Standard
14645 XHTML output remains
14646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14653 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
14655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14658 LyX and the World Wide Web
14659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14664 Additional Features
14666 manual, for more information.
14669 \begin_layout Standard
14670 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
14672 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14673 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14679 \begin_layout Subsection
14681 \begin_inset Index idx
14684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14693 \begin_layout Standard
14694 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the pagebreaks
14695 in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
14699 and choose a file type.
14700 A viewing program will pop up showing the output.
14703 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14706 you can use the toolbar button
14707 \begin_inset Graphics
14708 filename ../../images/buffer-view_dvi.png
14715 arg "buffer-view dvi"
14720 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14722 \begin_inset space ~
14728 \begin_inset Graphics
14729 filename ../../images/buffer-view_pdf2.png
14735 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14739 \begin_inset Graphics
14740 filename ../../images/buffer-view_ps.png
14747 arg "buffer-view ps"
14753 \begin_layout Standard
14754 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
14755 viewer window using the menu
14757 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14763 \begin_layout Standard
14764 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
14766 To have a real output, export your document.
14769 \begin_layout Subsection
14770 Printing the File from within LyX
14771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14773 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
14780 \begin_layout Standard
14781 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
14782 it directly from within LyX.
14783 To print a file, select the menu
14785 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14788 or click on the toolbar button
14789 \begin_inset Graphics
14790 filename ../../images/dialog-show_print.png
14795 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
14796 This file is then processed by the program
14800 to PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
14805 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
14808 \begin_layout Standard
14809 You can choose to print only even-numbered or odd-numbered pages — this
14810 is useful for printing on two sides: You can re-insert the pages after
14811 printing one set to print on the other side.
14812 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
14813 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
14814 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
14817 \begin_layout Standard
14818 You can set the parameters in the
14821 \begin_inset space ~
14829 \begin_layout Labeling
14830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14835 This is the name of the printer to print to.
14839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14840 Note that this printer name is for the program
14849 has to be configured for this printer name.
14850 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
14851 \begin_inset space ~
14855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14857 reference "sub:Printer"
14866 The printer should understand PostScript.
14869 \begin_layout Labeling
14870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14875 The name of a file to print to.
14876 The output will be a PostScript file.
14877 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
14881 \begin_layout Section
14882 A few Words about Typography
14883 \begin_inset Index idx
14886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14895 \begin_layout Subsection
14897 \begin_inset Index idx
14900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14909 \begin_layout Standard
14911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14922 character comes in four lengths: the
14934 , and the minus sign:
14935 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
14941 \begin_layout Standard
14942 \begin_inset Tabular
14943 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
14944 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
14945 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
14946 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
14947 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
14948 <row interlinespace="3mm">
14949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
14952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
14961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
14970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14977 <row interlinespace="3mm">
14978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
14981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
14990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
14999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15017 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15042 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15044 \begin_inset space ~
15047 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15054 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15079 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15081 \begin_inset space ~
15084 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15105 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15139 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15145 \begin_layout Standard
15146 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15158 character multiple times in a row.
15159 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15160 the final output, but not in LyX.
15162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15192 \begin_layout Standard
15193 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15194 math mode and has a length of its own.
15195 Here are some examples of the
15196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15210 \begin_layout Enumerate
15211 line- and page-breaks
15212 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15222 \begin_layout Enumerate
15224 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15234 \begin_layout Enumerate
15235 Oh — there's a dash.
15236 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15246 \begin_layout Enumerate
15247 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15251 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15261 \begin_layout Subsection
15263 \begin_inset Index idx
15266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15275 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15282 \begin_layout Standard
15283 Words aren't hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15284 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15289 \begin_inset Index idx
15292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15293 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15298 following the rules of the document language
15302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15303 For German readers: That's one of the main differences between the languages
15311 \begin_inset space ~
15315 \begin_inset space ~
15322 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15333 \begin_layout Standard
15334 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly, it only has problems with text in the
15339 font and with unusual constructs, like
15340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15348 If LaTeX can't break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
15349 This is done with the menu
15351 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15352 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15354 \begin_inset space ~
15360 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15361 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15364 \begin_layout Standard
15365 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15366 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15376 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15384 as a hyphenation possibility.
15385 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15386 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15387 as described in section
15388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15391 Prevent Hyphenation
15392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15402 \begin_layout Subsection
15404 \begin_inset Index idx
15407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15417 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15420 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15427 \begin_layout Standard
15428 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15429 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15430 LaTeX then adds the
15431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15434 appropriate amount of space
15435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15439 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15441 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period as a word uses.
15444 \begin_layout Standard
15445 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15446 not work in all cases.
15448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15459 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15460 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15463 \begin_layout Standard
15464 Here are some examples of
15468 abbreviations and the end of a sentence:
15471 \begin_layout Itemize
15476 \begin_layout Itemize
15481 \begin_layout Standard
15482 And here's an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15485 \begin_layout Itemize
15487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15491 this is too much space!
15494 \begin_layout Itemize
15499 \begin_layout Standard
15500 You won't see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15503 \begin_layout Standard
15504 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15507 \begin_layout Enumerate
15511 \begin_inset space ~
15516 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15517 \begin_inset space ~
15521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15523 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15528 \begin_inset Index idx
15531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15532 Spaces ! inter-word
15540 \begin_layout Enumerate
15544 \begin_inset space ~
15549 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15550 \begin_inset space ~
15554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15556 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
15561 \begin_inset Index idx
15564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15573 \begin_layout Enumerate
15577 \begin_inset space ~
15581 \begin_inset space ~
15585 \begin_inset space ~
15592 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15594 \begin_inset space ~
15599 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15600 This function is also bound to
15603 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15609 \begin_layout Standard
15610 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15613 \begin_layout Itemize
15615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15619 \begin_inset space \space{}
15622 this is too much space!
15625 \begin_layout Itemize
15626 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
15630 \begin_layout Standard
15631 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15632 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
15633 will take care of this.
15636 \begin_layout Standard
15637 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
15641 \begin_inset space ~
15646 feature described in section
15652 Additional Features
15657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15659 \begin_inset Index idx
15662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15663 Typography ! Quotes
15669 \begin_inset Index idx
15672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15703 \begin_layout Standard
15704 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
15705 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
15706 and use a closing quote at the end.
15708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15716 The keyboard character,
15720 , generates this automatically.
15723 \begin_layout Standard
15724 You can change the behavior of the
15728 key using the submenu
15734 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15738 \begin_inset Index idx
15741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15742 Document ! Settings
15750 \begin_layout Standard
15751 You can also select quotes for different languages in the box
15756 There are six choices:
15759 \begin_layout Labeling
15760 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15772 Use quotes like this
15773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15781 \begin_inset Quotes els
15785 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15791 \begin_layout Labeling
15792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15795 \begin_inset Quotes sld
15799 \begin_inset Quotes srd
15805 \begin_inset Quotes sld
15809 \begin_inset Quotes srd
15813 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15819 \begin_layout Labeling
15820 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15823 \begin_inset Quotes gld
15827 \begin_inset Quotes grd
15833 \begin_inset Quotes gld
15837 \begin_inset Quotes grd
15841 \begin_inset Quotes gls
15845 \begin_inset Quotes grs
15851 \begin_layout Labeling
15852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15855 \begin_inset Quotes pld
15859 \begin_inset Quotes prd
15865 \begin_inset Quotes pld
15869 \begin_inset Quotes prd
15873 \begin_inset Quotes pls
15877 \begin_inset Quotes prs
15883 \begin_layout Labeling
15884 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15887 \begin_inset Quotes fld
15891 \begin_inset Quotes frd
15897 \begin_inset Quotes fld
15901 \begin_inset Quotes frd
15905 \begin_inset Quotes fls
15909 \begin_inset Quotes frs
15915 \begin_layout Labeling
15916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15919 \begin_inset Quotes ald
15923 \begin_inset Quotes ard
15929 \begin_inset Quotes ald
15933 \begin_inset Quotes ard
15937 \begin_inset Quotes als
15941 \begin_inset Quotes ars
15947 \begin_layout Standard
15948 These settings affect what character the
15955 \begin_layout Subsection
15957 \begin_inset Index idx
15960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15961 Typography ! Ligatures
15967 \begin_inset Index idx
15970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16001 name "sub:Ligatures"
16008 \begin_layout Standard
16009 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16010 print them as single characters.
16011 These groups are known as
16016 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16018 Here are the standard ligatures:
16021 \begin_layout Itemize
16025 \begin_layout Itemize
16029 \begin_layout Itemize
16033 \begin_layout Itemize
16037 \begin_layout Itemize
16041 \begin_layout Standard
16042 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16045 \begin_layout Standard
16046 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16047 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16055 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16071 To break a ligature, use
16073 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16074 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16076 \begin_inset space ~
16083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16094 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16111 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16119 \begin_layout Subsection
16121 \begin_inset Index idx
16124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16133 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16140 \begin_layout Standard
16141 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16142 characters in different sizes and heights.
16143 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16144 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16164 \begin_inset Note Note
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16168 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16176 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16177 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16182 Note the order of the upper-and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the following
16186 \begin_layout Description
16187 LyX The name of the game, write
16188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16209 \begin_layout Description
16210 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16232 \begin_layout Description
16233 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16255 \begin_layout Description
16256 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16278 \begin_layout Standard
16279 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16284 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16292 It's an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16293 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16294 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16297 : The actual version is
16298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16305 , the previous one was
16306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16316 \begin_layout Standard
16317 If you don't want to use proper names, e.
16318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16322 \begin_inset space \space{}
16325 in section headings, you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the
16327 This will look in LyX like:
16328 \begin_inset Graphics
16329 filename ../clipart/LaTeX.png
16335 \begin_inset Newline newline
16338 For more about TeX Code, look at section
16339 \begin_inset space ~
16343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16345 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16352 \begin_layout Subsection
16354 \begin_inset Index idx
16357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 \begin_layout Standard
16367 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16368 space between two words.
16369 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16379 for units use the menu
16381 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16382 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16384 \begin_inset space ~
16392 arg "space-insert thin"
16398 \begin_layout Standard
16399 Here's an example to show the differences:
16402 \begin_layout Standard
16403 \begin_inset Tabular
16404 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16405 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16406 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16407 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16414 \begin_inset space ~
16418 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16430 space between number and unit
16437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16446 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16458 half space between number and unit
16471 \begin_layout Subsection
16473 \begin_inset Index idx
16476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16477 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16485 \begin_layout Standard
16486 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16488 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16489 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16490 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16491 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16492 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16493 These bits of text became known as
16504 \begin_layout Standard
16505 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16506 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16507 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16508 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16509 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16510 to specifically prevent widows and orphans.
16511 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16514 \begin_layout Standard
16515 There's no way we can go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page,
16516 or how you can tweak that behavior.
16517 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography [such as
16518 \begin_inset space ~
16522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16524 key "latexcompanion"
16529 \begin_inset space ~
16533 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16539 ] may have more information.
16540 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16543 \begin_layout Chapter
16544 Notes, Graphics, Tables, and Floats
16545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16547 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16554 \begin_layout Standard
16555 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16560 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16563 \begin_layout Section
16565 \begin_inset Index idx
16568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16584 \begin_layout Standard
16585 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16588 \begin_layout Description
16590 \begin_inset space ~
16593 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16594 \begin_inset Newline newline
16598 \begin_inset Note Note
16601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16602 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16610 \begin_layout Description
16611 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it appears as LaTeX-comm
16612 ent, when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
16614 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16615 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16617 \begin_inset space ~
16623 \begin_inset Newline newline
16627 \begin_inset Note Comment
16630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16631 This is text in a note box that only appears as comment in LaTeX-files.
16639 \begin_layout Description
16641 \begin_inset space ~
16644 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16645 set in the document settings under
16647 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16649 \begin_inset space ~
16655 \begin_inset Newline newline
16659 \begin_inset Newline newline
16663 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16672 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16673 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16678 of a comment that appears in the output.
16684 \begin_inset Newline newline
16688 \begin_inset Newline newline
16691 As you can see in the example, the first line of greyed out notes is a bit
16692 indented and greyed out notes can have footnotes.
16695 \begin_layout Standard
16696 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
16704 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16708 Right-click on the appearing note box to select the note type.
16711 \begin_layout Section
16713 \begin_inset Index idx
16716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16725 name "sec:Footnotes"
16732 \begin_layout Standard
16733 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
16736 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16739 or the toolbar button
16742 arg "footnote-insert"
16754 \begin_inset Graphics
16755 filename ../clipart/footnoteQt4.png
16764 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
16774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16793 label, the box will
16797 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
16798 Clicking on the box label again, will close
16811 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply mark it and click
16827 \begin_layout Standard
16828 Here is an example footnote:
16836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16837 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
16845 \begin_layout Standard
16846 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
16847 position where the footnote box is placed.
16848 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
16849 The footnote number is calculated by LyX.
16850 The numbers are consecutive, no matter in which chapter the footnote is
16852 LyX doesn't support other numbering schemes yet, but you can get other
16853 schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
16858 ey are described in the
16865 \begin_layout Section
16867 \begin_inset Index idx
16870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16879 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
16886 \begin_layout Standard
16887 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
16888 When you insert a margin note via the menu
16890 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16892 \begin_inset space ~
16897 or the toolbar button
16900 arg "marginalnote-insert"
16919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16926 appearing within your text.
16927 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
16936 \begin_layout Standard
16937 At the side is an example marginal note.
16941 \begin_inset Marginal
16944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16945 This is a marginal note.
16953 \begin_layout Standard
16954 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
16955 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
16956 pages, right on odd pages.
16959 \begin_layout Standard
16960 For further information about marginal notes see section
16963 \begin_inset space ~
16971 \begin_inset space ~
16979 \begin_layout Section
16980 Graphics and Images
16981 \begin_inset Index idx
16984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16991 \begin_inset Index idx
16994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17003 name "sec:Graphics"
17010 \begin_layout Standard
17011 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17012 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17013 \begin_inset Graphics
17014 filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_graphics.png
17020 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17024 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17027 \begin_layout Standard
17028 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17033 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17034 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17036 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17037 \begin_inset space ~
17041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17043 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
17050 \begin_layout Standard
17055 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17056 of the image in the output.
17057 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17061 \begin_inset space ~
17065 \begin_inset space ~
17074 \begin_inset space ~
17078 \begin_inset space ~
17082 \begin_inset space ~
17087 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17088 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17096 \begin_layout Standard
17099 LaTeX and LyX options
17101 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17102 You can also specify here the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17106 \begin_inset space ~
17111 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17112 with the image size is printed.
17116 \begin_inset space ~
17120 \begin_inset space ~
17124 \begin_inset space ~
17129 is explained in the
17140 \begin_layout Standard
17141 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17142 The image will appear in the output exactly at the position where it is
17144 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17148 \begin_layout Standard
17150 \begin_inset Graphics
17151 filename ../clipart/mobius.eps
17153 rotateOrigin center
17160 \begin_layout Standard
17161 If you need image captions and want to reference images, you have to put
17162 the image into a float, see section
17163 \begin_inset space ~
17167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17169 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17176 \begin_layout Subsection
17178 \begin_inset Index idx
17181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17190 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17197 \begin_layout Standard
17198 You can insert images in any known file format.
17199 But as we explained in section
17200 \begin_inset space ~
17204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17206 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17210 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17211 LyX uses therefore the program
17215 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17216 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17217 you can use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17218 \begin_inset space ~
17222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17224 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17231 \begin_layout Standard
17232 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17235 \begin_layout Description
17237 \begin_inset space ~
17240 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17241 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17242 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17246 Graphics Interchange Format
17247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17250 (GIF, file extension
17251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17263 \begin_inset Index idx
17266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17298 Portable Network Graphics
17299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17302 (PNG, file extension
17303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17315 \begin_inset Index idx
17318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17350 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17354 (JPG, file extension
17355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17379 \begin_inset Index idx
17382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17413 \begin_layout Description
17415 \begin_inset space ~
17418 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17420 The scaling ability is necessary if you want to create presentations, because
17421 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17422 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17423 \begin_inset Newline newline
17426 Scalable image formats can be
17427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17430 Scalable Vector Graphics
17431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17434 (SVG, file extension
17435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17447 \begin_inset Index idx
17450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17482 Encapsulated PostScript
17483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17486 (EPS, file extension
17487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17499 \begin_inset Index idx
17502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17534 Portable Document Format
17535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17538 (PDF, file extension
17539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17551 \begin_inset Index idx
17554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17561 We say it can be, because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF
17562 or EPS and the result won't be scalable.
17563 In this cases only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17569 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17577 \begin_layout Standard
17578 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only vice
17582 \begin_layout Subsection
17583 Grouping of Image Settings
17584 \begin_inset Index idx
17587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17588 Images ! Settings grouping
17596 \begin_layout Standard
17597 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17599 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17600 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17602 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17603 need to manually change each of them.
17607 \begin_layout Standard
17608 A new group can be set by entering a name in the
17611 \begin_inset space ~
17616 field in the Graphics dialog.
17617 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
17618 by checking the name of the desired group.
17621 \begin_layout Section
17623 \begin_inset Index idx
17626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17642 \begin_layout Standard
17643 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
17644 \begin_inset Graphics
17645 filename ../../images/tabular-insert.png
17652 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17656 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
17657 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
17658 from the rest of the table.
17659 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
17660 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
17662 Here's an example table:
17665 \begin_layout Standard
17667 \begin_inset Tabular
17668 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
17669 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17670 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17671 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17672 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
17673 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17873 \begin_layout Subsection
17877 \begin_layout Standard
17878 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button, which
17879 brings up the table dialog.
17880 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell and row/column respectively
17881 where the cursor is placed currently.
17882 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
17883 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
17884 done on all of your selection.
17887 \begin_layout Standard
17888 Additionally to the table dialog, the
17891 \begin_inset space ~
17896 helps you in setting table properties.
17897 It appears when the cursor is inside a table.
17900 \begin_layout Standard
17904 \begin_inset space ~
17909 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
17910 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
17911 current cell respectively.
17912 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
17914 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
17915 of text, see section
17916 \begin_inset space ~
17920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17922 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
17929 \begin_layout Standard
17930 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
17931 using the check box
17940 This will merge the cells to
17944 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
17945 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
17946 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
17947 Here's an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
17948 in the last row without the upper border:
17951 \begin_layout Standard
17953 \begin_inset Tabular
17954 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
17955 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
17956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17957 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
17958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
17959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17970 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17979 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18055 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18090 \begin_layout Standard
18091 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18092 They are necessary for special table formatting, like for multirow cells,
18093 explained in the tables section of the
18096 \begin_inset space ~
18102 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18106 degrees counterclockwise.
18107 These rotations are not visible in LyX but in the output.
18110 \begin_layout Standard
18111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18119 Most DVI-viewers are
18123 able to display rotations.
18131 \begin_layout Standard
18136 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18141 adds lines for all cell borders.
18144 \begin_layout Subsection
18146 \begin_inset Index idx
18149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18150 Tables ! Longtables
18156 \begin_inset Index idx
18159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18168 \begin_layout Standard
18169 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18172 \begin_inset space ~
18176 \begin_inset space ~
18185 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18186 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18189 \begin_layout Description
18194 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18195 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable;
18196 except for the first page, if
18199 \begin_inset space ~
18207 \begin_layout Description
18211 \begin_inset space ~
18216 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18217 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18220 \begin_layout Description
18225 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18226 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable;
18227 except for the last page, if
18230 \begin_inset space ~
18238 \begin_layout Description
18242 \begin_inset space ~
18247 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18248 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18251 \begin_layout Description
18252 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18253 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18255 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18259 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18262 \begin_inset space ~
18270 \begin_layout Standard
18271 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18272 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18273 of the fact that only the first one is used in the given table row.
18274 The others will then be defined as
18279 In this context, first means first in this order:
18282 \begin_inset space ~
18294 \begin_inset space ~
18300 See the following longtable to see how it works:
18303 \begin_layout Standard
18305 \begin_inset Tabular
18306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18307 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18308 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18309 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18310 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18311 <row endfirsthead="true">
18312 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18318 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18323 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18332 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18342 <row endfirsthead="true">
18343 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18354 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18363 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18375 <row endhead="true">
18376 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18387 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18406 <row endhead="true">
18407 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18418 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18427 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18439 <row endfoot="true">
18440 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18451 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18491 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19432 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19450 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19523 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19554 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19647 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19740 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19895 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 <row endlastfoot="true">
20422 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20459 \begin_layout Subsection
20461 \begin_inset Index idx
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20473 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20480 \begin_layout Standard
20481 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20482 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20483 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20484 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20488 , etc.), nor set spacing options etc.
20489 for the cell's paragraph.
20492 \begin_layout Standard
20493 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20494 for the column in the table dialog.
20495 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20496 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20500 \begin_layout Standard
20502 \begin_inset Tabular
20503 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20504 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
20505 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20506 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20507 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20596 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 This is longer now.
20657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20709 This is longer now.
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 \begin_layout Standard
20741 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
20742 You can cut and paste even more than one row.
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 Note, that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would
20748 not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
20754 Selection with the mouse or with
20758 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
20759 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
20760 the selection from outside the table.
20763 \begin_layout Section
20765 \begin_inset Index idx
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20784 \begin_layout Subsection
20788 \begin_layout Standard
20789 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
20790 have a fixed location.
20792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20799 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
20807 \begin_inset space ~
20812 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
20813 too many notes on the page.
20816 \begin_layout Standard
20817 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
20818 Images and tables can be spread evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
20819 and pages without text.
20820 As the floating often destroys the context between the text and the image/table
20821 , every float can be referenced in the text.
20822 Floats are therefore numbered.
20823 Referencing is described in section
20824 \begin_inset space ~
20828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20830 reference "sec:Cross-References"
20837 \begin_layout Standard
20838 To insert a float, use the menu
20840 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
20844 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
20845 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
20847 After the label you can insert the caption text.
20848 \begin_inset Index idx
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
20860 paragraph within the float.
20861 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
20862 by left-clicking on the box label.
20863 A closed float box looks like this:
20864 \begin_inset Graphics
20865 filename ../clipart/floatQt4.png
20870 – a gray button with a red label.
20873 \begin_layout Standard
20874 It is recommended to insert floats as a separate paragraph to avoid possible
20875 LaTeX-errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
20878 \begin_layout Subsection
20882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20886 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
20891 \begin_inset Index idx
20894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20897 Floats ! Figure floats
20905 \begin_layout Standard
20907 \begin_inset space ~
20911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20913 reference "cap:Platypus"
20917 was created using the menu
20919 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
20920 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
20923 or the toolbar button
20926 arg "float-insert figure"
20930 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
20933 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
20936 or the toolbar button
20939 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20943 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
20944 in front of or behind the image and using the menu
20946 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
20948 \begin_inset space ~
20953 or the toolbar button
20956 arg "layout-paragraph"
20962 \begin_layout Standard
20963 \begin_inset Float figure
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 \begin_inset Graphics
20971 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20981 \begin_inset Caption Standard
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20986 name "cap:Platypus"
20990 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21003 \begin_layout Standard
21004 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21006 As described in section
21007 \begin_inset space ~
21011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21013 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21017 , you can simply insert a label in the caption using the menu
21019 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21022 or the toolbar button
21028 and refer to it using the menu
21030 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21033 or the toolbar button
21036 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21040 It is important to use references to figure floats, rather than using vague
21042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21049 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21061 \begin_layout Standard
21062 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21063 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21064 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21065 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21066 as described in section
21067 \begin_inset space ~
21071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21073 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21079 \begin_inset space ~
21083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21085 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21089 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21090 You can also set the images one below the other.
21092 \begin_inset space ~
21096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21098 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21105 reference "fig:Platypus"
21109 are the subfigures.
21112 \begin_layout Standard
21113 \begin_inset Float figure
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21123 \begin_inset Float figure
21128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21136 name "fig:Undefinable"
21148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 \begin_inset Graphics
21150 filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21161 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21165 \begin_inset Float figure
21170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21178 name "fig:Platypus"
21190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 \begin_inset Graphics
21192 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
21204 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21216 name "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21220 Two distorted images.
21233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21235 \begin_inset Index idx
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 Floats ! Table floats
21249 \begin_layout Standard
21250 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21252 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21253 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21256 or the toolbar botton
21259 arg "float-insert table"
21263 They have the same properties as figure floats except for the different
21266 \begin_inset space ~
21270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21272 reference "cap:Table-float"
21279 \begin_layout Standard
21280 \begin_inset Float table
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21291 name "cap:Table-float"
21303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 \begin_inset Tabular
21306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21307 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21310 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21389 \end{array}\right]$
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21422 \begin_layout Subsection
21424 \begin_inset Index idx
21427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21438 \begin_layout Standard
21439 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21440 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21441 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21443 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in chapter
21451 \begin_inset space ~
21459 \begin_layout Section
21461 \begin_inset Index idx
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21473 name "sec:Minipages"
21480 \begin_layout Standard
21481 LaTeX provides a mechanism to produce essentially a page within a page,
21483 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21484 \begin_inset space ~
21491 \begin_layout Standard
21492 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21494 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21498 Right-clicking on the box allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21499 and its alignment within the page.
21502 \begin_layout Standard
21504 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21514 height_special "totalheight"
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21520 This is a minipage.
21521 The text is set in an italic style.
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
21528 another formatting.
21536 \begin_layout Standard
21537 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21540 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
21544 as described in section
21545 \begin_inset space ~
21549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21551 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
21556 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21562 \begin_layout Standard
21563 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21573 height_special "totalheight"
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21578 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21584 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21588 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21598 height_special "totalheight"
21601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21603 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21611 \begin_layout Standard
21612 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
21618 \begin_layout Standard
21619 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can change the box from a minipage
21620 to other box types.
21621 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
21632 \begin_layout Chapter
21633 Mathematical Formulas
21634 \begin_inset Index idx
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 \begin_inset Index idx
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21678 name "cha:Mathematical-Formulas"
21685 \begin_layout Standard
21686 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21691 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21694 \begin_layout Section
21696 \begin_inset Index idx
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21708 \begin_layout Standard
21709 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
21710 \begin_inset Graphics
21711 filename ../../images/math-mode.png
21716 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
21718 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
21719 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
21720 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
21722 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21728 \begin_layout Standard
21729 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
21733 \begin_inset space ~
21738 , that appears when the cursor is in a formula.
21741 \begin_layout Standard
21742 There are two main types of formulas: Inline formulas appear within a text
21743 line, like this one:
21746 \begin_layout Standard
21747 This is a line with an inline formula
21748 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
21754 \begin_layout Standard
21755 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in an own paragraph
21757 \begin_inset Formula
21764 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
21767 \begin_layout Standard
21768 LyX supports also many LaTeX math commands.
21770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21774 \begin_inset space \space{}
21778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21791 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
21792 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
21796 So typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
21799 \begin_inset space ~
21807 \begin_layout Subsection
21808 Navigating in Formulas
21809 \begin_inset Index idx
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21821 \begin_layout Standard
21822 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
21823 achieved with the arrow keys.
21824 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
21825 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
21830 will leave a formula construct (a square root
21831 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
21835 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
21839 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21842 \end{array}\right]$
21850 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
21855 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
21856 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
21859 \begin_layout Standard
21864 , printed in this document as
21865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21886 \begin_inset Note Note
21889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 This command will appear in the output as official character denoting the
21891 space character (visible space).
21896 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
21897 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
21898 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
21903 For example, if you want
21904 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
21915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21958 , since in the latter case only the
21961 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
21966 will be under the square root sign:
21967 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
21973 \begin_layout Standard
21974 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
21976 \begin_inset Formula
21978 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
21987 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
21988 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
21991 \begin_layout Subsection
21995 \begin_layout Standard
21996 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
21997 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22001 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22002 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22003 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22004 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22005 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22008 \begin_layout Subsection
22009 Exponents and Subscripts
22010 \begin_inset Index idx
22013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 \begin_inset Index idx
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 \begin_layout Standard
22033 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts, but the much easier
22034 way is to use a command.
22036 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22039 , type in a formula
22045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22061 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22067 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22071 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22092 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22101 , you have to use an extra
22105 to separate the hat and the character.
22107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22111 \begin_inset space \space{}
22115 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 Subscripts are similar: To get
22137 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22160 \begin_layout Subsection
22162 \begin_inset Index idx
22165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 \begin_layout Standard
22175 Create a fraction with either the command
22182 \begin_inset Graphics
22183 filename ../../images/math/frac.png
22191 \begin_inset space ~
22197 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22198 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22199 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22204 To move back up, press
22209 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22210 \begin_inset Formula
22212 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22215 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22223 \begin_layout Subsection
22225 \begin_inset Index idx
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 \begin_layout Standard
22238 Roots can be created using the
22241 \begin_inset space ~
22247 \begin_inset Graphics
22248 filename ../../images/math/sqrt.png
22271 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22277 produces always a square root.
22280 \begin_layout Subsection
22281 Operators with Limits
22282 \begin_inset Index idx
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 \begin_inset Index idx
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22304 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22311 \begin_layout Standard
22313 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22317 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22320 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22321 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22322 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22323 The sum operator will automatically place its
22324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22331 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and on the side in inline
22334 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22338 \begin_inset Formula
22340 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22345 Integral signs, however, will place the limits on the side in both formula
22349 \begin_layout Standard
22350 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22352 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22353 behind the operator and hitting
22361 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22362 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22364 \begin_inset space ~
22368 \begin_inset space ~
22376 \begin_layout Standard
22377 Certain other mathematical expressions have this
22378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22385 feature as addition, such as
22386 \begin_inset Index idx
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 \begin_inset Formula
22398 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22403 which will place the
22404 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22416 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22417 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22423 \begin_layout Standard
22424 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22431 Have a look at section
22432 \begin_inset space ~
22436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22438 reference "sub:Functions"
22442 for an explanation of function macros.
22445 \begin_layout Subsection
22447 \begin_inset Index idx
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22459 \begin_layout Standard
22460 Most math symbols can be found in the
22463 \begin_inset space ~
22468 under one of several categories; including
22485 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22489 \begin_layout Standard
22490 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
22491 you don't have to use the
22494 \begin_inset space ~
22499 , but can type the command directly into the formula.
22500 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22503 \begin_layout Subsection
22505 \begin_inset Index idx
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 \begin_layout Standard
22518 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
22523 arg "space-insert protected"
22529 \begin_inset space ~
22535 \begin_inset Graphics
22536 filename ../../images/math/space.png
22541 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
22542 For example, the sequence
22547 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
22551 \begin_inset Graphics
22552 filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png
22557 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
22558 the space marker and hit space again several times.
22559 With every space hit the size will be changed.
22560 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
22562 Here are two examples:
22565 \begin_layout Standard
22575 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
22581 \begin_layout Standard
22591 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
22597 \begin_layout Subsection
22599 \begin_inset Index idx
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22611 name "sub:Functions"
22618 \begin_layout Standard
22622 \begin_inset space ~
22627 contains under the button
22628 \begin_inset Graphics
22629 filename ../../images/math/functions.png
22633 a number of function macros, such as
22634 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
22638 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
22646 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
22653 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
22654 avoid confusions, because
22655 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
22659 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
22665 \begin_layout Standard
22666 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
22668 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
22672 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
22678 \begin_layout Standard
22679 For some mathematical objects, like the limes, the macro changes where subscript
22680 s are placed, as described in section
22681 \begin_inset space ~
22685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22687 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22694 \begin_layout Subsection
22696 \begin_inset Index idx
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22708 \begin_layout Standard
22709 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
22711 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
22712 You can also use LaTeX commands to e.
22713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22717 \begin_inset space \space{}
22721 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
22724 even if your keyboard doesn't have hat-accents enabled.
22725 Our example is entered by typing
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 \begin_inset space ~
22750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22752 reference "cap:Accent-names-and"
22756 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
22759 \begin_layout Standard
22760 \begin_inset Float table
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22766 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22771 name "cap:Accent-names-and"
22775 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 \begin_inset Tabular
22786 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
22787 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22788 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22789 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22790 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22874 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
22884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22928 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
22938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
22992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23144 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23252 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23306 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23372 \begin_layout Standard
23373 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23376 \begin_inset space ~
23382 \begin_inset Graphics
23383 filename ../../images/math/hat.png
23387 in the math panel ; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23391 \begin_layout Section
23392 Brackets and Delimiters
23393 \begin_inset Index idx
23396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 \begin_inset Index idx
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23415 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23422 \begin_layout Standard
23423 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23424 For most purposes, using just the keys
23429 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23430 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23431 toolbar delimiter icon
23432 \begin_inset Graphics
23433 filename ../../images/math/delim.png
23438 For example, that's how you would construct the brackets around a standard
23440 \begin_inset Formula
23442 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23450 and to make it easier to see the layers of parentheses as in:
23451 \begin_inset Formula
23453 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}
23461 \begin_layout Standard
23462 The parentheses, and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size
23463 to accommodate the size of what is inside.
23466 \begin_layout Standard
23467 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23468 left side and right side.
23469 If you use the option
23472 \begin_inset space ~
23477 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23478 The selection will be shown below the button field.
23479 If you want one side to not have a bracket, use the blank button.
23480 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23483 \begin_layout Standard
23484 If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root,
23485 you can do that by highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go
23486 inside the brackets.
23487 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23492 The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure.
23495 \begin_layout Section
23496 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
23497 \begin_inset Index idx
23500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23507 \begin_inset Index idx
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23517 \begin_inset Index idx
23520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23521 Math ! Multi-line Equations
23529 \begin_layout Standard
23530 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
23533 \begin_inset space ~
23539 \begin_inset Graphics
23540 filename ../../images/math/matrix.png
23545 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
23546 Here is an example:
23547 \begin_inset Formula
23549 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23558 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
23559 \begin_inset space ~
23563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23565 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23570 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
23571 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
23572 This alignment is set in the box
23577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23625 for every column as default.
23626 For example, the sequence
23627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23638 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
23639 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
23640 corresponds to the relevant column.
23641 The result will look like this:
23642 \begin_inset Formula
23645 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
23646 column & has & has\, right\\
23647 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
23656 \begin_layout Standard
23657 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by hitting
23660 arg "newline-insert newline"
23663 while the cursor is in the matrix.
23664 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
23666 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23669 or the math toolbar.
23672 \begin_layout Standard
23673 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
23674 It can be created with the menu
23676 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23677 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23679 \begin_inset space ~
23691 Here is an example:
23692 \begin_inset Formula
23706 \begin_layout Standard
23707 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23710 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
23713 arg "newline-insert newline"
23717 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
23722 arg "newline-insert newline"
23725 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
23726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23733 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
23734 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
23735 A new row is created by every further hit of
23738 arg "newline-insert newline"
23742 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
23743 Here is an example:
23744 \begin_inset Formula
23746 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
23747 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
23752 To change the column assignment of the formula parts, place the cursor
23753 where you want to start the shift and hit
23758 It shifts everything in the column which is right beside the current cursor
23759 position to the next column.
23760 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs, structures
23761 within this column will be printed in a smaller size:
23762 \begin_inset Formula
23764 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
23772 \begin_layout Standard
23773 The multi-line formula type described here is called
23780 There are other multi-line types being more suitable for certain situations,
23781 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula (
23782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23784 reference "eq:asquared"
23789 The other types are described in section
23790 \begin_inset space ~
23794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23796 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
23803 \begin_layout Section
23804 Formula Numbering and Referencing
23805 \begin_inset Index idx
23808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 Math ! Formula numbering
23815 \begin_inset Index idx
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 Math ! Referencing formulas
23825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23827 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
23834 \begin_layout Standard
23835 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
23837 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23838 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23840 \begin_inset space ~
23848 arg "math-number-toggle"
23852 The formula number appears in LyX as
23853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23860 within parentheses.
23862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23869 denotes that the number will be calculated automatically when the output
23871 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
23872 the document class.
23873 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
23874 separated by a dot:
23875 \begin_inset Formula
23885 arg "math-number-toggle"
23888 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
23889 You can only number displayed formulas.
23892 \begin_layout Standard
23893 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
23895 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23896 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23898 \begin_inset space ~
23902 \begin_inset space ~
23906 \begin_inset space ~
23914 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
23917 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
23918 \begin_inset Formula
23921 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
23927 To number all lines use the shortcut
23930 arg "math-number-toggle"
23936 \begin_layout Standard
23937 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23940 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
23941 A label is inserted with the menu
23943 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23946 when the cursor is in the formula.
23947 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
23948 It is recommended to use the proposed
23949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23960 as first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the label
23961 type when you have many labels in your document.
23962 We inserted in the following example the label
23963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23970 in the second line:
23971 \begin_inset Formula
23973 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
23974 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
23979 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
23980 Therefore the label is shown in LyX at the place of the formula number
23982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23990 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
23992 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23994 \begin_inset space ~
24000 A dialog appears to choose a label you want refer to.
24001 The reference appears in LyX as a grey cross reference box and in the output
24002 as the formula number:
24005 \begin_layout Standard
24006 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24009 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24016 \begin_layout Standard
24017 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24018 \begin_inset space ~
24022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24024 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24029 To delete a label, set the cursor in the labeled formula, use the menu
24032 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24035 and delete the label in the appearing dialog.
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 This is a unintuitive and will be fixed in the next version of LyX.
24048 \begin_layout Section
24049 User defined math macros
24050 \begin_inset Index idx
24053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24062 \begin_layout Standard
24063 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24064 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24065 Math macros are explained in section
24068 \begin_inset space ~
24080 \begin_layout Section
24084 \begin_layout Subsection
24086 \begin_inset Index idx
24089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 \begin_layout Standard
24099 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24100 To set a font in a formula, use the
24103 \begin_inset space ~
24109 \begin_inset Graphics
24110 filename ../../images/math/font.png
24114 , or enter its command, listed in table
24115 \begin_inset space ~
24119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24121 reference "cap:Typefaces-and-the"
24128 \begin_layout Standard
24129 \begin_inset Float table
24134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24135 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24140 name "cap:Typefaces-and-the"
24144 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24154 \begin_inset Tabular
24155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24156 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24190 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24217 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24277 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24331 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24392 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 \begin_layout Standard
24427 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24435 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24451 \begin_layout Standard
24452 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24453 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24458 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24459 space when you need a space in the box.
24460 Here an example where
24461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24472 denotes the set of numbers:
24473 \begin_inset Formula
24475 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
24483 \begin_layout Standard
24484 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24490 \begin_inset space \space{}
24502 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24506 \begin_inset Newline newline
24509 So it is better not to use this feature.
24512 \begin_layout Standard
24513 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24514 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24518 \begin_inset Newline newline
24521 You can only print them emboldened using the command
24527 , which works like the other typeface commands:
24528 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
24534 \begin_layout Standard
24541 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
24544 \begin_layout Standard
24545 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
24547 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24548 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24550 \begin_inset space ~
24558 \begin_layout Subsection
24560 \begin_inset Index idx
24563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24572 \begin_layout Standard
24573 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
24575 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
24579 \begin_inset space ~
24583 \begin_inset space ~
24591 \begin_inset space ~
24597 \begin_inset Graphics
24598 filename ../../images/math/font.png
24609 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
24610 You can use spaces and accents in math text like in normal text.
24611 Here is an example:
24612 \begin_inset Formula
24615 x & \textrm{if I say so}\\
24616 -x & \textrm{unter Umständen}
24625 \begin_layout Subsection
24627 \begin_inset Index idx
24630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24639 \begin_layout Standard
24640 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
24641 automatically chosen in most situations.
24659 For most characters,
24667 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
24668 and certain other structures, are set larger in
24673 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
24674 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
24676 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
24677 \begin_inset Graphics
24678 filename ../../images/math/style.png
24683 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
24684 For example, you can set
24685 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
24688 , which is normally in
24697 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
24701 The four styles are used in the following example:
24704 \begin_layout Standard
24705 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
24709 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
24713 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
24717 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
24723 \begin_layout Standard
24724 All these math-mode font sizes are relative, that means, if the whole math
24725 inset is set in a particular size with the menu
24727 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24729 \begin_inset space ~
24734 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
24735 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
24736 will be adjusted to correspond.
24737 As an example here is a formula in the font size
24738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24748 \begin_layout Standard
24752 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
24758 \begin_layout Section
24762 \begin_layout Standard
24763 As of LyX 1.6, support for theorem-like environments has been moved out of
24764 the document classes and into layout modules.
24765 \begin_inset Index idx
24768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24774 As a result, theorem-like environments can now easily be used with classes
24775 other than the AMS classes.
24777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24779 reference "sub:Modules"
24783 for more on layout modules.
24786 \begin_layout Section
24788 \begin_inset Index idx
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24798 \begin_inset Index idx
24801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24810 \begin_layout Standard
24811 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
24812 (AMS) that are in common use.
24815 \begin_layout Subsection
24816 Enabling AMS-Support
24819 \begin_layout Standard
24820 Selecting the checkbox
24823 \begin_inset space ~
24827 \begin_inset space ~
24831 \begin_inset space ~
24838 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24842 \begin_inset Index idx
24845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24846 Document ! Settings
24854 \begin_inset space ~
24859 will include the AMS-packages in the document, and make the facilities
24861 AMS is needed for many math-constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in
24862 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
24865 \begin_layout Subsection
24867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24869 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24874 \begin_inset Index idx
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24878 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24886 \begin_layout Standard
24887 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
24888 LyX allows you to choose between
24909 We refer to the AMS-documentation for an explanation of these formula types.
24912 \begin_layout Chapter
24916 \begin_layout Section
24918 \begin_inset Index idx
24921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24930 name "sec:Cross-References"
24937 \begin_layout Standard
24938 One of LyX's strengths are cross-references.
24939 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
24941 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
24942 The label is used as anchor and name for the reference.
24943 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
24946 \begin_layout Enumerate
24950 \begin_layout Enumerate
24951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24953 name "enu:Second-item"
24960 \begin_layout Enumerate
24964 \begin_layout Standard
24965 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
24967 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24970 or by pressing the toolbar button
24971 \begin_inset Graphics
24972 filename ../../images/label-insert.png
24978 A grey label box like this:
24979 \begin_inset Graphics
24980 filename ../clipart/labelQt4.png
24985 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
24986 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
24988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25021 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted, e.
25022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25026 \begin_inset space \space{}
25029 if you insert a label into a section heading, the prefix will be
25030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25044 \begin_layout Standard
25045 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25047 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25050 or the toolbar button
25051 \begin_inset Graphics
25052 filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_ref.png
25058 A grey cross-reference box like this:
25059 \begin_inset Graphics
25060 filename ../clipart/referenceQt4.png
25065 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25067 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25080 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25084 \begin_layout Standard
25087 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25090 , you can right-click on a label and use in the appearing context menu
25095 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be copied
25096 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25098 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25104 \begin_layout Standard
25105 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25106 \begin_inset space ~
25110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25112 reference "enu:Second-item"
25119 \begin_layout Standard
25120 It is recommended to use a protected space
25124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25125 described in section
25126 \begin_inset space ~
25130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25132 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25141 between the cross-reference name and its number to avoid ugly line breaks
25145 \begin_layout Standard
25146 There are six varieties of cross-references:
25149 \begin_layout Description
25150 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25153 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
25160 \begin_layout Description
25161 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25162 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25174 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25181 \begin_layout Description
25182 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25183 \begin_inset space ~
25187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25188 LatexCommand pageref
25189 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
25196 \begin_layout Description
25198 \begin_inset space ~
25202 \begin_inset space ~
25205 <page>: prints the text "on page" and the page number:
25206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25207 LatexCommand vpageref
25208 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
25215 \begin_layout Description
25217 \begin_inset space ~
25221 \begin_inset space ~
25225 \begin_inset space ~
25228 <page>: prints the number, the text "on page", and the page number:
25229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25231 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
25238 \begin_layout Description
25240 \begin_inset space ~
25243 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25244 \begin_inset Newline newline
25248 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25256 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25265 \begin_inset Index idx
25268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25269 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25275 \begin_inset Index idx
25278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25290 \begin_inset Newline newline
25293 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25296 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25300 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25301 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25305 The format is specified by adding the command
25317 (refstyle) to the preamble of the document.
25318 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25331 ) can be done with this command
25332 \begin_inset Newline newline
25339 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25344 \begin_inset Newline newline
25347 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25349 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25351 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25358 \begin_layout Description
25360 \begin_inset space ~
25363 reference: prints the caption or name of the reference:
25364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25365 LatexCommand nameref
25366 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
25373 \begin_layout Standard
25378 will not print the page number if the label is on the previous, the same,
25381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25385 \begin_inset space \space{}
25389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25403 <reference> on page <page>
25405 will not print anything about the page if the label is on the same page.
25408 \begin_layout Standard
25409 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25410 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
25411 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25415 of the cross-reference window, that appear when you click on the cross-referenc
25419 \begin_layout Standard
25420 You can only use the style
25424 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25428 is always possible.
25431 \begin_layout Standard
25432 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25433 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25435 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25436 \begin_inset space ~
25440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25442 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25449 \begin_layout Standard
25450 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25454 \begin_inset space ~
25458 \begin_inset space ~
25463 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25464 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25467 \begin_inset space ~
25472 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25473 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25474 \begin_inset Graphics
25475 filename ../../images/bookmark-goto_0.png
25476 rotateOrigin center
25483 \begin_layout Standard
25484 You can change labels at any time.
25485 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25486 do not need to take care about this.
25489 \begin_layout Standard
25490 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see two question
25491 marks in the output instead of the reference.
25494 \begin_layout Standard
25495 References are described in detail in sec.
25496 \begin_inset space ~
25500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25514 \begin_layout Section
25515 Table of Contents and other Listings
25516 \begin_inset Index idx
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25526 \begin_inset Index idx
25529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25545 \begin_layout Subsection
25547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25549 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
25556 \begin_layout Standard
25557 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
25559 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25560 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25562 \begin_inset space ~
25566 \begin_inset space ~
25572 Is is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
25573 If you click on it, the
25577 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline to move and rearrange
25578 sections in your documents.
25579 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
25581 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25584 that is described in sec.
25585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25591 reference "sec:Navigating"
25598 \begin_layout Standard
25599 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
25600 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
25602 \begin_inset space ~
25606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25608 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
25612 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
25614 \begin_inset space ~
25618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25620 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
25624 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
25626 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
25629 \begin_layout Subsection
25630 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
25631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25633 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
25640 \begin_layout Standard
25641 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
25642 You can insert them via the
25644 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25646 \begin_inset space ~
25650 \begin_inset space ~
25656 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
25659 \begin_layout Section
25660 URLs and Hyperlinks
25661 \begin_inset Index idx
25664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25671 \begin_inset Index idx
25674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25683 \begin_layout Subsection
25685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25694 \begin_layout Standard
25695 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
25697 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25703 \begin_layout Standard
25704 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
25705 \begin_inset Flex URL
25708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25718 \begin_layout Standard
25719 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
25725 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
25729 \begin_layout Standard
25730 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25738 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
25746 \begin_layout Subsection
25748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25750 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
25757 \begin_layout Standard
25758 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
25760 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25763 or with the toolbar button
25764 \begin_inset Graphics
25765 filename ../../images/href-insert.png
25770 The appearing dialog has two fields:
25779 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
25780 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
25781 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25783 name "LyX's homepage"
25784 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25788 , an Email address like this:
25789 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25791 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
25792 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
25797 , or a link to a file.
25800 \begin_layout Standard
25801 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink, but
25803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25814 to the link target.
25817 \begin_layout Standard
25818 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
25819 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
25820 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
25821 the text style dialog.
25822 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
25826 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25828 name "LyX's homepage"
25829 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25836 \begin_layout Standard
25837 The link text color can be changed, when the option
25841 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
25843 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25844 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25848 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
25850 \begin_inset Newline newline
25858 \begin_inset Newline newline
25865 in the PDF Properties dialog.
25868 \begin_layout Section
25870 \begin_inset Index idx
25873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25882 name "sec:Appendices"
25889 \begin_layout Standard
25890 Appendices are created with the menu
25892 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25894 \begin_inset space ~
25898 \begin_inset space ~
25904 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
25905 as the appendix region.
25906 The region is marked with a red borderline.
25909 \begin_layout Standard
25910 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix region is treated as an appendix,
25911 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
25912 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
25913 and the subsection number.
25914 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
25918 \begin_layout Standard
25920 \begin_inset space ~
25924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25926 reference "cha:Credits"
25931 \begin_inset space ~
25935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25937 reference "sub:Export"
25944 \begin_layout Section
25946 \begin_inset Index idx
25949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25958 name "sec:Bibliography"
25965 \begin_layout Standard
25966 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
25967 You can include a bibliography database,
25971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25972 Known under the name
25973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25985 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
25986 manually, using the paragraph environment
25990 , which was described in section
25991 \begin_inset space ~
25995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25997 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26002 If you want anything other than numerical citations that are used in this
26003 document, like author-year citations, then you must
26007 use a bibliography database.
26010 \begin_layout Subsection
26011 The Bibliography Environment
26014 \begin_layout Standard
26019 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26021 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26030 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26032 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26041 , a short form of its title, as key.
26044 \begin_layout Standard
26045 You can refer to the key of a bibliography entry using the menu
26047 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26050 or the toolbar button
26051 \begin_inset Graphics
26052 filename ../../images/dialog-show-new-inset_citation.png
26057 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26058 in which you can select one or more keys in the available key list.
26059 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key.
26060 When you click on the box, the citation window appears and you can change
26064 \begin_layout Standard
26065 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26066 entry with surrounding brackets.
26071 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26072 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26084 \begin_layout Standard
26087 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26090 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26092 key "latexcompanion"
26099 \begin_layout Standard
26100 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26101 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26110 \begin_layout Subsection
26111 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26112 \begin_inset Index idx
26115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 Bibliography ! Databases
26122 \begin_inset Index idx
26125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26126 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26134 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26141 \begin_layout Standard
26142 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26148 They are also useful simply for keeping a database of articles and notes
26150 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26151 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26156 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26158 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26159 your working field in a database.
26160 This database can be used for different documents, and only the entries
26161 cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for
26163 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26167 \begin_layout Standard
26168 The database is a text file with the file extension
26169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26180 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26181 The format is explained in
26182 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26188 and in LaTeX books (
26189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26191 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26196 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26197 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26198 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26199 \begin_inset Flex URL
26202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26204 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26212 \begin_layout Standard
26213 To use a database, use the menu
26215 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26220 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26233 \begin_inset space ~
26239 A grey box will be inserted and a window appears.
26240 In this window you can load one or more databases and a style file.
26243 Add bibliography to TOC
26245 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26250 drop box you can select whether to include > all the entries in the database
26251 in the document or just the cited references.
26254 \begin_layout Standard
26255 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26267 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26268 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26269 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26271 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26277 For information how this is done, have a look at
26278 \begin_inset Newline newline
26282 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26284 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26296 \begin_layout Standard
26297 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26300 \begin_layout Standard
26301 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26304 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as processor;
26305 either in the document settings under
26309 or in LyX's preferences under
26311 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26326 The following variants are possible:
26329 \begin_layout Description
26332 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, does not work with
26333 other bibliography packages (like e.
26334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26338 \begin_inset space ~
26345 ), only with the package
26349 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26353 \begin_layout Description
26356 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26357 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26358 with all bibliography packages, except of
26363 \begin_layout Description
26366 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in a 8-bit encoding,
26371 , works with all.bibliography packages
26374 \begin_layout Standard
26377 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26381 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended to read the manual of
26387 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26396 \begin_layout Standard
26397 When you select the option
26399 Sectioned bibliography
26403 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26406 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26407 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26409 Customizing Bibliographies
26417 Additional Features
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26424 the two methods of creating them.
26425 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26426 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26427 We used the style file
26431 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26434 \begin_layout Subsection
26435 Bibliography layout
26436 \begin_inset Index idx
26439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26440 Bibliography ! Layout
26448 \begin_layout Standard
26449 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26450 For this feature you need to enable the option
26456 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26460 \begin_inset Index idx
26463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26464 Document ! Settings
26474 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26475 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
26476 in the previous section.
26479 \begin_layout Standard
26480 You can also set text, that should appear before or after a citation reference,
26481 in the citation reference window.
26482 Here an example where we set the text
26483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26487 \begin_inset space ~
26491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26494 to appear after the reference:
26497 \begin_layout Standard
26499 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26502 key "latexcompanion"
26509 \begin_layout Section
26511 \begin_inset Index idx
26514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26530 \begin_layout Standard
26531 An index entry is created if you use the menu
26533 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26535 \begin_inset space ~
26540 or the toolbar button
26541 \begin_inset Graphics
26542 filename ../../images/index-insert.png
26548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26559 is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
26560 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
26561 by LyX as the index entry.
26564 \begin_layout Standard
26565 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
26566 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
26568 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26570 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
26577 \begin_layout Standard
26578 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
26580 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26582 \begin_inset space ~
26586 \begin_inset space ~
26589 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26591 \begin_inset space ~
26597 A light blue box labeled
26598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26609 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
26610 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
26613 \begin_layout Subsection
26614 Grouping Index Entries
26615 \begin_inset Index idx
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26627 \begin_layout Standard
26628 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
26630 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
26631 lists under the entry
26632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26640 First we create the entry
26641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26649 \begin_inset space ~
26653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26655 reference "sub:Lists"
26660 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
26661 \begin_inset space ~
26665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26667 reference "sec:Itemize"
26671 , we insert the command
26674 \begin_layout Standard
26680 \begin_layout Standard
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26691 for the enumerated list in section
26692 \begin_inset space ~
26696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26698 reference "sec:Enumerate"
26705 \begin_layout Standard
26706 The exclamation mark
26707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26714 marks the grouping levels.
26715 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
26716 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
26717 If we don't have an index entry for
26718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26725 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
26728 \begin_layout Subsection
26730 \begin_inset Index idx
26733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26734 Index ! Page ranges
26742 \begin_layout Standard
26743 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
26745 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
26747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26751 \begin_inset space \space{}
26754 if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create an index entry
26756 \begin_inset space ~
26760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26762 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
26769 \begin_layout Standard
26772 Paragraph environments|(
26775 \begin_layout Standard
26776 and another entry at the end of section
26777 \begin_inset space ~
26781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26783 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
26790 \begin_layout Standard
26793 Paragraph environments|)
26796 \begin_layout Standard
26798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26821 respectively start and end the index range.
26822 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
26823 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
26824 the pages of the indexed document parts.
26825 An example is the index entry
26826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26829 Document ! Settings
26830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26836 \begin_layout Subsection
26838 \begin_inset Index idx
26841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26842 Index ! Cross referencing
26850 \begin_layout Standard
26851 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
26852 We referred for example in the index entry
26853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26861 \begin_inset space ~
26865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26867 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
26871 ) to the index entry
26872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26879 in the same section using the entry
26882 \begin_layout Standard
26885 GIF|see{Image formats}
26888 \begin_layout Standard
26889 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
26890 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
26891 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
26894 \begin_layout Subsection
26896 \begin_inset Index idx
26899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26900 Index ! Entry order
26908 \begin_layout Standard
26909 You can use accented characters in the index entry, but the entries might
26910 then not follow the rules for the index order.
26911 The index entries are sorted alphabetically, but LaTeX
26915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
26918 \begin_inset space ~
26922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26924 reference "sub:Index-Program"
26933 doesn't know how to sort accents in different languages.
26934 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
26935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26959 \begin_inset Index idx
26962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26963 Dummy entries ! maïs
26969 \begin_inset Index idx
26972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26973 Dummy entries ! maître
26979 \begin_inset Index idx
26982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26983 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
26988 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison, but we want the
26989 order maïs, maison, maître.
26990 To achieve this, we use the command
26993 \begin_layout Standard
26996 previous entry@current entry
26999 \begin_layout Standard
27000 In our case we want to have
27001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27016 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27019 \begin_layout Standard
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27026 The previous entry needn't to be a real existing entry, you can also use
27027 another word to tell LaTeX the entry order, see the next subsection for
27031 \begin_layout Standard
27032 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27038 \begin_layout Standard
27039 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27044 to generate the index (see sec.
27045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27051 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27060 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27068 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27072 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27073 index commands start with
27074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27086 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27091 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27094 \begin_layout Standard
27106 \begin_layout Standard
27118 \begin_layout Subsection
27120 \begin_inset Index idx
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27124 Index ! Entry layout
27132 \begin_layout Standard
27133 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27134 \begin_inset Index idx
27137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27140 This is an italic dummy entry
27145 You can also format the page number using the character
27146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27153 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27154 We can write for example
27157 \begin_layout Standard
27160 italic page number:|textit
27163 \begin_layout Standard
27164 to get the page number in italic.
27165 \begin_inset Index idx
27168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27169 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27174 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27192 \begin_inset space ~
27198 Have a look at section
27199 \begin_inset space ~
27203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27205 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27209 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27212 \begin_layout Standard
27213 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27221 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27225 to generate the index, see sec.
27226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27232 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27241 , however, this won't work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27242 This is because xindy requires you to define semantic elements before
27243 they can be used, see
27244 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27247 key "latexcompanion"
27259 \begin_layout Standard
27260 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27262 Instead of this, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27263 Consider why you want some page numbers to be bold.
27264 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27265 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27266 If so, put the following in the preamble
27269 \begin_layout Standard
27281 \begin_layout Standard
27285 \begin_layout Standard
27291 \begin_layout Standard
27292 in the index entry.
27293 \begin_inset Index idx
27296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27297 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27302 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27303 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27304 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27307 \begin_layout Standard
27308 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27314 \begin_inset space \space{}
27317 we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get a bold font
27318 for all index entries.
27319 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27331 documentation for details,
27332 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27334 key "makeindex,xindy"
27341 \begin_layout Subsection
27343 \begin_inset Index idx
27346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27355 name "sub:Index-Program"
27362 \begin_layout Standard
27363 If the index entry program
27367 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27371 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27381 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27382 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27383 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27384 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27394 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27395 dialog, see section
27396 \begin_inset space ~
27400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27402 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27407 The available options are listed and explained in
27408 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27410 key "makeindex,xindy"
27415 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27419 \begin_layout Standard
27420 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27421 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27424 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27425 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27429 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27430 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27433 \begin_layout Subsection
27437 \begin_layout Standard
27438 In many fields, it is common to have more than one index.
27439 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27447 next to the standard index.
27448 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are many
27449 packages that add this feature.
27455 \begin_inset Index idx
27458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27459 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
27464 package to generate multiple indexes.
27465 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
27466 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX Catalogue,
27467 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27474 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
27475 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27476 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27479 \begin_layout Standard
27480 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27482 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27483 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27490 Use multiple Indexes
27491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27495 Note that the list of
27496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27503 below already contains the standard index.
27504 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27505 also appear as a heading) to the
27506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27513 input field and press the
27514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27522 The new index should now appear in the list as well.
27523 If you like, you can attribute an alternative label color to the new index
27524 by selecting the index in the list and hitting the
27525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27528 Alter Color\SpecialChar \ldots{}
27530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27534 The label color may help you to differentiate index entries of different
27535 indexes in the LyX work area.
27538 \begin_layout Standard
27539 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27542 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27544 \begin_inset space ~
27548 \begin_inset space ~
27557 menu has a separate index entry for each of the defined indexes.
27558 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
27559 are some additional features:
27562 \begin_layout Itemize
27563 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
27564 on the entry will open a dialog where you can do that.
27567 \begin_layout Itemize
27568 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
27569 Furthermore, you can specify an index list to be a
27570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27578 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
27580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27583 g., if you use a book class, where the standard index heading is defined
27584 as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested
27585 to the non-subindexes.
27588 \begin_layout Section
27589 Nomenclature / Glossary
27590 \begin_inset Index idx
27593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27600 \begin_inset Index idx
27603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27634 name "sec:Nomenclature"
27641 \begin_layout Standard
27642 Sometimes you need to compile a list of symbols that are mentioned in your
27643 document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or
27647 \begin_layout Standard
27648 To be able to create nomenclatures, you need the LaTeX package
27653 \begin_inset Index idx
27656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27657 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
27663 You find it in the TeX Catalogue,
27664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27670 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
27673 \begin_layout Standard
27674 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
27675 and then use the menu
27677 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27683 \begin_inset space ~
27688 or the toolbar button
27689 \begin_inset Graphics
27690 filename ../../images/nomencl-insert.png
27696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27707 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
27710 \begin_layout Standard
27711 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
27712 The first is the symbol that you want to refer to.
27713 The second is the description of the symbol.
27716 \begin_layout Standard
27717 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27725 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
27733 \begin_layout Subsection
27734 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
27735 \begin_inset Index idx
27738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27739 Nomenclature ! Layout
27747 \begin_layout Standard
27748 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
27752 field as LaTeX-formulas.
27754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27758 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27766 \begin_inset Newline newline
27774 \begin_inset Newline newline
27780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27787 character starts/ends the formula.
27788 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
27790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27800 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
27810 \begin_layout Standard
27811 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
27812 \begin_inset space ~
27816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27818 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27825 \begin_layout Standard
27829 \begin_inset space ~
27834 dialog to format the description text but have to use LaTeX-commands.
27835 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
27836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27840 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27847 in this document is:
27848 \begin_inset Newline newline
27853 dummy entry for the character
27858 \begin_inset Newline newline
27870 \begin_inset space ~
27880 font use the command
27909 \begin_layout Subsection
27910 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
27911 \begin_inset Index idx
27914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27915 Nomenclature ! Sort order
27923 \begin_layout Standard
27924 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
27925 the symbol definition.
27926 This leads to undesired results when you for example have symbols in formulas.
27927 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
27930 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
27931 LatexCommand nomenclature
27933 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
27940 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27944 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
27945 LatexCommand nomenclature
27948 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
27953 They will be sorted by
27954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27980 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27983 will be sorted before the
27987 since the character
27988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27995 is considered in sorting.
27998 \begin_layout Standard
27999 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28002 \begin_inset space ~
28007 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28008 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28010 For the example given, you can insert
28014 in this field for the
28015 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28022 will be located before
28023 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28029 \begin_layout Standard
28030 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28035 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28044 \begin_layout Subsection
28045 Nomenclature Options
28046 \begin_inset Index idx
28049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28050 Nomenclature ! Options
28058 \begin_layout Standard
28063 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28064 Here are some of its options, for more have a look at its documentation:
28067 \begin_layout Description
28068 refeq Appends the phrase
28069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28084 to every nomenclature entry, where
28090 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28093 \begin_layout Description
28094 refpage Appends the phrase
28095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28110 to every nomenclature entry, where
28116 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28119 \begin_layout Description
28120 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28123 \begin_layout Standard
28124 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28125 class options list in the
28127 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28131 In this document the options
28138 \begin_layout Standard
28139 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28146 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28147 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28152 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28155 \begin_layout Description
28165 \begin_layout Description
28168 nomrefpage Like the
28175 \begin_layout Description
28178 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28187 \begin_layout Description
28191 \begin_inset space ~
28197 \begin_inset space ~
28202 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28205 \begin_layout Standard
28207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28214 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28215 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28218 \begin_layout Standard
28226 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28229 \begin_inset Newline newline
28236 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28241 \begin_inset Newline newline
28245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28260 by their translation.
28263 \begin_layout Subsection
28264 Printing the Nomenclature
28265 \begin_inset Index idx
28268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28269 Nomenclature ! Printing
28277 \begin_layout Standard
28278 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28280 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28282 \begin_inset space ~
28286 \begin_inset space ~
28289 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28305 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28308 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28309 You can choose between these settings:
28312 \begin_layout Description
28315 Default a space of 1
28316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28322 \begin_layout Description
28326 \begin_inset space ~
28330 \begin_inset space ~
28333 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28336 \begin_layout Description
28339 Custom custom space
28342 \begin_layout Standard
28343 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28352 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28360 For example, in order to change the name to
28364 , add the following line to the preamble:
28367 \begin_layout Standard
28375 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28378 \begin_layout Subsection
28379 Nomenclature Program
28380 \begin_inset Index idx
28383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28384 Nomenclature ! Program
28390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28392 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28399 \begin_layout Standard
28400 LyX uses the program
28404 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28405 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28410 by adding options, see section
28411 \begin_inset space ~
28415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28417 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28422 The available options are listed and explained in
28423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28425 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28432 \begin_layout Section
28434 \begin_inset Index idx
28437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28444 \begin_inset Index idx
28447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28448 Document ! Branches
28454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28456 name "sec:Branches"
28463 \begin_layout Standard
28464 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28465 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28466 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28467 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28470 \begin_layout Standard
28471 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
28472 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28473 To create a branch, either select the menu
28475 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28476 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28479 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28481 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28488 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28489 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28490 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
28491 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28492 (see below for an example).
28493 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28494 to the name of the other) and to add
28495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28507 \begin_inset space ~
28510 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28511 , without having being defined) to the document's branch list.
28514 \begin_layout Standard
28515 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28516 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28518 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28521 where you can choose a branch.
28522 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28526 \begin_layout Standard
28527 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28528 is deactivated and does therefore not appear in the output:
28531 \begin_layout Standard
28532 \begin_inset Branch Question
28535 \begin_layout Standard
28536 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
28544 \begin_layout Standard
28545 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28548 \begin_layout Standard
28549 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
28557 \begin_layout Standard
28564 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28565 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28568 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
28569 Consider for example a file
28570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28577 which has the above branches.
28579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28586 is active, the PDF export file would be called
28587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28610 branch were inactive,
28611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28626 branch was active, likewise
28627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28642 branch was active, and
28643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28646 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
28647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28650 if both branches were active.
28651 This helps you to easily export different versions of your document without
28655 \begin_layout Standard
28656 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28662 \begin_layout Standard
28663 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
28664 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
28666 For example you can define for the question branch
28670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28671 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
28672 \begin_inset space ~
28676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28678 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28690 \begin_layout Standard
28700 \begin_layout Standard
28710 \begin_layout Standard
28711 and for the answer branch
28714 \begin_layout Standard
28724 \begin_layout Standard
28734 \begin_layout Standard
28735 \begin_inset Branch Question
28738 \begin_layout Standard
28742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28770 \begin_layout Standard
28771 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28774 \begin_layout Standard
28778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28806 \begin_layout Standard
28807 Now it is possible to use the commands
28811 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
28818 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
28821 to obtain conditional output.
28822 Here is an example formula where only the
28829 \begin_inset Formula
28831 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
28839 \begin_layout Standard
28840 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
28848 \begin_layout Section
28850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28852 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
28857 \begin_inset Index idx
28860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28869 \begin_layout Standard
28874 dialog allows you in the
28878 to set up special options for the PDF output of your document.
28879 All options there are provided by the LaTeX-package
28884 \begin_inset Index idx
28887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28888 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
28896 \begin_layout Standard
28901 will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
28902 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
28903 table of contents entry or on a reference and he is shown the referenced
28905 You can specify in the dialog tab
28909 how the links will look like and if links for bibliographical backreferences
28911 The backreferences will appear in the bibliography behind the different
28912 entries, showing the number of the section, slide, or page where the entry
28916 \begin_layout Standard
28921 you can set if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of your
28922 document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
28923 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
28925 With the open bookmarks level you can specify what sectioning level should
28926 be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
28928 \begin_inset space ~
28931 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
28932 \begin_inset space ~
28935 1 will only display the sections.
28938 \begin_layout Standard
28939 The header information in the dialog tab
28943 are saved together with the PDF as file properties.
28944 Many programs are able to extract this information to e.
28945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28949 \begin_inset space \space{}
28952 automatically recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
28953 This is very useful to sort, classify, or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
28956 Automatic fill header
28958 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
28959 title and author settings.
28962 \begin_layout Standard
28965 Load in fullscreen mode
28967 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
28970 \begin_layout Standard
28971 PDF properties are also used in this document.
28972 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
28978 For an explanation of them we refer you to the hyperref manual
28979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28988 \begin_layout Section
28989 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
28990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28992 name "sec:TeX-Code"
28999 \begin_layout Subsection
29001 \begin_inset Index idx
29004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29013 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29020 \begin_layout Standard
29021 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29022 constructs, but not all.
29023 LaTeX contains of hundreds of packages which provide different commands.
29024 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29025 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29026 is for every problem a LaTeX-package.
29027 But LyX can of course not be up to date and support all packages and their
29031 \begin_layout Standard
29032 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29034 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29036 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29038 \begin_inset space ~
29043 or by the toolbar button
29044 \begin_inset Graphics
29045 filename ../../images/ert-insert.png
29050 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29054 \begin_layout Standard
29055 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29056 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29057 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29058 using the LaTeX-command
29064 , you can write the command part
29070 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29074 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29075 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29076 the following example:
29079 \begin_layout Standard
29080 \begin_inset Graphics
29081 filename ../clipart/ERT.png
29089 \begin_layout Standard
29093 \begin_layout Standard
29094 This is a line with a
29098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29121 \begin_layout Standard
29122 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29130 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29131 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29139 \begin_layout Subsection
29140 Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29141 \begin_inset Argument 1
29144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29151 \begin_inset Index idx
29154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29163 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29171 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29172 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29173 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29182 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29183 any time if you know the right commands.
29185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29189 \begin_inset space \space{}
29192 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the
29194 Your boss just has complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29195 all caption labels bold.
29196 But you have over hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29198 Of course it's impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29202 \begin_layout Standard
29203 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29204 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29205 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
29207 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29216 \begin_layout Standard
29217 As result you know that the package
29222 \begin_inset Index idx
29225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29226 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29232 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29234 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29240 \begin_layout Standard
29245 usepackage[options]{package name}
29248 \begin_layout Standard
29249 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29250 two braces, and the options are set within two brackets.
29251 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29254 \begin_layout Standard
29255 In your case the package name is
29260 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29265 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29266 So you add the command
29269 \begin_layout Standard
29274 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29277 \begin_layout Standard
29278 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29283 For more commands provided by the
29287 package, have a look at its documentation,
29288 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29302 \begin_layout Standard
29303 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well known problems
29305 For example if you use a
29309 class, you don't need the package
29313 , you can instead write
29316 \begin_layout Standard
29321 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29326 \begin_layout Standard
29327 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29328 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29329 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29336 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29339 \begin_layout Standard
29340 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29341 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29343 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29344 the previous section.
29347 \begin_layout Standard
29348 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29350 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29352 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29359 \begin_layout Standard
29360 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29366 \begin_layout Standard
29370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29380 \begin_inset Note Note
29383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29384 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29392 \begin_layout Left Header
29393 \begin_inset Argument 1
29396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29416 \begin_inset Note Note
29419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29420 defines the header line as described below
29428 \begin_layout Center Header
29429 \begin_inset Argument 1
29432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29441 \begin_layout Right Header
29442 \begin_inset Argument 1
29445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29466 \begin_layout Left Footer
29467 \begin_inset Argument 1
29470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29491 \begin_layout Center Footer
29492 \begin_inset Argument 1
29495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29506 \begin_inset Newline newline
29510 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
29516 \begin_layout Right Footer
29517 \begin_inset Argument 1
29520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29542 \begin_layout Section
29543 Customized Page Headers and Footers
29544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29546 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
29551 \begin_inset Index idx
29554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29557 Document ! Header/Footer line
29563 \begin_inset Index idx
29566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29577 \begin_layout Standard
29578 To define custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
29579 to set the headings style to
29585 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29591 \begin_inset space ~
29597 As second step add in the menu
29599 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29600 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29607 Custom Header/Footerlines
29608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29612 This module offers the 6
29613 \begin_inset space ~
29619 \begin_layout Description
29621 \begin_inset space ~
29625 \begin_inset space ~
29629 \begin_inset space ~
29633 \begin_inset space ~
29637 \begin_inset space ~
29643 \begin_layout Description
29645 \begin_inset space ~
29649 \begin_inset space ~
29653 \begin_inset space ~
29657 \begin_inset space ~
29661 \begin_inset space ~
29667 \begin_layout Standard
29668 for the different positions in the header/footer.
29671 \begin_layout Standard
29672 Normally, headers and footers are set up in the beginning of the document.
29673 but you can change them anywhere you want to.
29675 \begin_inset space ~
29679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29681 reference "fig:Page-layout"
29685 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
29688 \begin_layout Standard
29689 \begin_inset Float figure
29695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29698 \begin_inset Tabular
29699 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
29700 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
29701 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
29702 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
29703 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
29705 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
29717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29723 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29734 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
29746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29752 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29763 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
29766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29767 The normal text on the page goes here.
29768 The running header is above thel text, and the footer is below (including
29770 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
29771 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
29776 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
29779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29785 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29796 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
29808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29814 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
29837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29843 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29861 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29866 name "fig:Page-layout"
29870 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
29883 \begin_layout Subsection
29887 \begin_layout Standard
29888 To define your header line, add all 3
29889 \begin_inset space ~
29893 The things you add to the styles appear on uneven pages, the things in
29894 the optional arguments on even pages.
29895 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
29897 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
29898 Defining the footer line works similar.
29901 \begin_layout Standard
29902 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
29905 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29918 \begin_inset space ~
29926 \begin_layout Description
29929 thepage prints the current page number
29932 \begin_layout Description
29935 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
29938 \begin_layout Description
29941 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
29944 \begin_layout Description
29947 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
29948 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
29951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29955 \begin_inset Quotes prd
29958 because it usually goes in a left header.
29961 \begin_layout Description
29964 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
29965 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
29967 It is normally used in the right header.
29970 \begin_layout Subsection
29971 Default header/footer
29974 \begin_layout Standard
29975 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
29976 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
29977 footer has the page number.
29978 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
29979 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
29980 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
29983 \begin_inset space ~
29991 \begin_layout Subsection
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
29997 Some pages are different.
29998 The title page has a style of its own, and so has any page that starts
29999 a new part or chapter in your book.
30000 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30001 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30002 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30006 Header and footer decoration line
30009 \begin_layout Standard
30010 By default, you get a 0.4
30011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30014 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30015 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30027 in the following scheme:
30030 \begin_layout Standard
30037 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30040 \begin_layout Standard
30041 Where thickness is a size in standard units like
30050 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30058 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30059 If you really need this, have a look in the Internet or in sec.
30060 \begin_inset space ~
30064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30073 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30074 Several header/footer lines
30077 \begin_layout Standard
30078 In case that you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can
30079 do this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30080 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30082 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30094 in this scheme in your document preamble:
30097 \begin_layout Standard
30104 headheight}{height}
30107 \begin_layout Standard
30108 Where height is a size in standard units.
30109 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30110 your header/footer and preview your document as PDF.
30111 Then open the LaTeX logfile via the menu
30113 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30127 and look via the button
30130 \begin_inset space ~
30135 if you find a warning of the package
30140 \begin_inset Index idx
30143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30146 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30152 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30153 for your header/footer.
30156 \begin_layout Subsection
30160 \begin_layout Standard
30161 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30162 Don't use it for yor document as it is just an example.
30163 This example consists of the following definition:
30166 \begin_layout Description
30168 \begin_inset space ~
30177 , empty optional argument
30180 \begin_layout Description
30182 \begin_inset space ~
30185 Header empty, empty optional argument
30188 \begin_layout Description
30190 \begin_inset space ~
30199 in the optional argument
30202 \begin_layout Description
30204 \begin_inset space ~
30213 in the optional argument
30216 \begin_layout Description
30218 \begin_inset space ~
30230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30234 \begin_inset Newline newline
30238 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30245 in the optional argument
30248 \begin_layout Description
30250 \begin_inset space ~
30259 , empty optional argument
30262 \begin_layout Description
30265 headrulewidth set to 2
30266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30272 \begin_layout Standard
30273 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except of
30275 For more special things like e.
30276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30280 \begin_inset space ~
30283 thumb-indexes, see the manual of the
30288 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30297 \begin_layout Standard
30298 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30312 pagestyle{headings}
30318 \begin_inset Note Note
30321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30324 switches back to page style with the default headings
30332 \begin_layout Section
30333 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30336 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30341 \begin_inset Index idx
30344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30351 \begin_inset Index idx
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30363 \begin_layout Standard
30364 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
30365 fly so you can see how they'll look in the final document without having
30366 to break your train of thought with
30368 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30374 \begin_layout Standard
30375 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
30376 LaTeX, install the LaTeX-package
30381 \begin_inset Index idx
30384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30385 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
30390 as explained below, and turn on
30393 \begin_inset space ~
30400 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30404 \begin_inset space ~
30408 \begin_inset space ~
30411 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30416 \begin_inset space ~
30421 is the multiplication factor for the size.
30424 \begin_layout Standard
30425 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
30427 Previews of an already loaded document are
30431 generated just by selecting the
30434 \begin_inset space ~
30439 check box, you have to reopen the documents to activate the previews.
30442 \begin_layout Standard
30443 LyX will generate previews of math insets.
30444 It will also generate previews of included insets if you select the
30447 \begin_inset space ~
30452 check box in the insert dialog.
30453 This is useful if you wish to generate a preview of a LaTeX figure, for
30457 \begin_layout Standard
30458 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
30462 (on some systems named simply
30467 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
30469 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30475 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
30476 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30484 package; for LyX on Windows this program is automatically installed together
30488 \begin_layout Standard
30489 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30495 \begin_layout Standard
30496 You can furthermore preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts
30500 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30502 \begin_inset space ~
30507 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
30508 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph where the cursor is
30510 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
30511 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
30512 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
30513 the source view window.
30516 \begin_layout Section
30517 Advanced Find and Replace
30518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30520 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
30525 \begin_inset Index idx
30528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30535 \begin_inset Index idx
30538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30547 \begin_layout Subsection
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30552 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
30553 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
30554 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
30555 The key-features are:
30558 \begin_layout Itemize
30559 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
30560 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
30561 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
30565 \begin_layout Itemize
30566 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
30567 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
30568 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
30569 a section heading will only be found within section headings
30572 \begin_layout Itemize
30573 Search may be widened to a specific
30578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30582 \begin_inset space ~
30585 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
30586 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
30593 \begin_layout Itemize
30594 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
30595 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
30596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30600 \begin_inset space ~
30603 all lowercase, all uppercase, first uppercase followed by lowercase)
30606 \begin_layout Subsection
30610 \begin_layout Standard
30611 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX is activated through the menu
30614 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30627 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
30630 ) or the toolbar button
30633 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
30639 Advanced Find and Replace
30644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30648 \begin_layout Standard
30653 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
30658 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
30663 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
30664 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
30665 Pressing repeatedly
30669 keeps searching forward.
30670 Similarly, pressing
30674 searches for the entered text backwards.
30677 \begin_layout Standard
30678 While searching, the
30682 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
30692 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
30695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30696 Searching for mathematics
30699 \begin_layout Standard
30700 Mathematical formulas may be searched for by typing in the
30704 editor a mathematical formula, such as
30705 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
30708 or also something more complex like
30709 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
30713 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
30714 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas, for example
30715 the mentioned segments would be found in something like
30716 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
30722 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30726 \begin_layout Standard
30727 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
30728 This is done by switching to the
30732 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
30737 This way, entering in the
30744 \begin_layout Itemize
30745 a plain word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring
30746 in emphasized or boldface.
30749 \begin_layout Itemize
30750 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
30751 instances with same face only, and within the same text style only.
30752 Note that, for example, an emphasized text is found not only when occurring
30753 alone, but also when it is contained in a longer emphasized sentence.
30756 \begin_layout Itemize
30757 a plain word in a section heading, and searching for it, finds occurrences
30758 of if only within section headings.
30759 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
30760 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
30764 \begin_layout Itemize
30765 some mathematics in a displayed formula will only find instances of this
30766 formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
30769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30773 \begin_layout Standard
30774 The text segments matching the text entered in the
30778 editor may be replaced with the text segments entered in the
30786 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
30790 button or alternatively
30812 \begin_layout Standard
30813 You can replace full-featured formatted LyX segments in place of the matching
30814 text segments in your document.
30815 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability may be (just to mention
30819 \begin_layout Itemize
30820 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
30821 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
30822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30829 with its typewriter version
30832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30842 \begin_layout Itemize
30843 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
30845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30849 \begin_inset Formula $R$
30853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30861 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
30865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30868 (you may want to enable the
30876 options and disable the
30884 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
30885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30892 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
30893 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
30897 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
30900 , or occurrences of
30901 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
30905 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
30911 \begin_layout Subsection
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30916 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
30920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30921 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
30923 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30925 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
30934 You can search for regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
30940 This is done via the menu
30942 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30943 Insert Regular Expression
30945 while the cursor is in the
30950 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
30951 expression matching rules
30955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
30958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30962 \begin_inset space ~
30965 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
30966 to match expressions.
30971 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
30972 same text in the document.
30973 Note that it is allowed to cut and paste regexp-mode insets as usual.
30974 Examples of using such a feature may be:
30977 \begin_layout Enumerate
30978 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
30983 editor the fraction
30984 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
30988 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
30991 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
30992 fractions with the given denominator.
30995 \begin_layout Enumerate
30996 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31008 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31013 regular expression and adding for it an emphasized or bold face, finds
31014 all emphasized and bold face text, respectively.
31016 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31019 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31020 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31023 \begin_layout Standard
31024 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual,
31025 enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31026 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31029 , and referring back to them through
31030 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31034 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31038 For example, try searching for the regexp
31039 \begin_inset Formula $([a-z]+)[[:blank:]]\backslash1$
31042 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31045 \begin_layout Standard
31046 Note that back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
31047 and when occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of
31048 back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute, i.
31049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31053 \begin_inset space ~
31057 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31060 always refers to the first occurrence of
31061 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31064 in all entered regexps.
31067 \begin_layout Standard
31068 Note also that the use of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
31072 \begin_layout Section
31074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31076 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31081 \begin_inset Index idx
31084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31093 \begin_layout Standard
31094 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
31097 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31104 or the toolbar button
31107 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31110 starts the spell checking beginning from the current cursor position.
31111 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
31112 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
31113 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
31114 scrolled so that it is visible.
31115 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
31116 n, if any could be found.
31117 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy to the
31121 field, double-click invokes directly the replacement.
31122 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
31125 \begin_layout Standard
31126 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
31129 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31133 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
31134 a different one at the top of the dialog.
31135 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
31136 This work if you have marked the different languages appropriately and
31137 have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
31138 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
31141 \begin_layout Subsection
31145 \begin_layout Standard
31146 In LyX's preferences dialog under
31149 \begin_inset space ~
31152 Setting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31155 you can set the following things:
31158 \begin_layout Description
31160 \begin_inset space ~
31163 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
31164 Depending on your platform,
31178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31179 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
31180 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
31195 \begin_layout Description
31197 \begin_inset space ~
31200 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
31201 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
31204 \begin_layout Description
31206 \begin_inset space ~
31209 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
31211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31215 \begin_inset space \space{}
31219 This should normally not be needed.
31222 \begin_layout Description
31224 \begin_inset space ~
31228 \begin_inset space ~
31231 words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
31233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31243 \begin_layout Description
31245 \begin_inset space ~
31248 continously Check the spelling of your document as you type it.
31249 Misspelled words gets underlined with a dotted red line.
31250 By right-clicking on an underlined word, the suggestions by the spell appear
31251 in the context menu.
31252 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
31256 \begin_layout Description
31258 \begin_inset space ~
31262 \begin_inset space ~
31266 \begin_inset space ~
31269 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document contents is checked
31273 \begin_layout Section
31275 \begin_inset Index idx
31278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31287 name "sec:Thesaurus"
31294 \begin_layout Standard
31295 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
31296 It uses the same thesaurus framework as OpenOffice and Firefox (namely
31305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31306 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31308 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
31317 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
31318 Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which
31319 are available for many languages.
31322 \begin_layout Standard
31323 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
31327 \begin_layout Subsection
31328 Setting up the thesaurus
31331 \begin_layout Standard
31339 OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
31344 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
31349 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
31351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31355 en_EN for English).
31356 For instance, the English files are named:
31359 \begin_layout Itemize
31363 \begin_layout Itemize
31367 \begin_layout Standard
31368 If you have OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed, these files should be
31369 already on your system.
31370 If not, you can get dictionaries either from
31371 \begin_inset Flex URL
31374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31376 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/dictionaries/trunk/thes
31382 \begin_inset Flex URL
31385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31387 http://extensions.services.openoffice.org/en/search/node/thesaurus
31396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31397 Note that, as of OpenOffice
31398 \begin_inset space ~
31402 \begin_inset Flex URL
31405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31407 http://extensions.services.openoffice.org
31412 are usually packed in extension archives (
31416 ) that contain other files such as spellchecker dictionaries besides the
31418 These archives are simple zip files, so you can unpack them as you would
31419 unpack a zip archive.
31432 files of all languages you want to use into one directory (do not use subfolder
31433 s), and specify the path to this directory in
31435 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31436 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31440 Now the thesaurus should be ready to use.
31443 \begin_layout Subsection
31444 Using the thesaurus
31447 \begin_layout Standard
31448 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
31450 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31453 or the toolbar button
31454 \begin_inset Graphics
31455 filename ../../images/thesaurus-entry.png
31456 rotateOrigin center
31460 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
31462 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
31464 The proposals are grouped into categories.
31465 Note that the thesaurus does not only show synonyms, but also hyperonyms
31466 and hyponyms (such as
31474 ), compounds (such as
31478 ) and antonyms (such as
31486 ), which are marked as such.
31489 \begin_layout Standard
31490 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
31491 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
31495 \begin_layout Standard
31496 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
31497 the dictionary, such as the above
31501 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
31502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31506 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
31507 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
31508 For example looking up the word forms
31516 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
31521 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant parts of such word (e.
31522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31534 s), then you get proposals without adjusting the query in the dialog, and
31535 also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted
31536 part will be replaced, thus the ending remains).
31539 \begin_layout Subsection
31540 License of the Thesaurus library
31543 \begin_layout Standard
31548 library, which is used by LyX for the thesaurus, was created by
31553 as a standalone program.
31554 Version 1.1 of the library is included in LyX.
31555 The library was released under the
31557 Berkeley Database License
31559 , which is compatible with LyX's license, the GPL.
31560 In order to meet the requirements of the Berkeley Database License, the
31561 MyThes license file is included in the LyX sources in the folder
31563 ~src/support/mythes/license.readme
31566 In LyX Windows installations it is additionally available in the file
31570 that is in the same folder as the file lyx.exe.
31573 \begin_layout Section
31575 \begin_inset Index idx
31578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31585 \begin_inset Index idx
31588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31589 Document ! Change Tracking
31595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31597 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
31604 \begin_layout Standard
31605 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
31606 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
31607 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
31608 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
31610 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31612 \begin_inset space ~
31615 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31617 \begin_inset space ~
31625 \begin_layout Standard
31626 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
31640 The color depends on the author that made the change.
31641 You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under
31644 \begin_inset space ~
31648 \begin_inset space ~
31658 \begin_inset Index idx
31661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31662 Color ! Change tracking
31667 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
31668 the cursor is in changed text.
31669 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
31670 \begin_inset Graphics
31671 filename ../../images/changes-merge.png
31672 rotateOrigin center
31679 \begin_layout Standard
31680 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
31681 \begin_inset Index idx
31684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31693 \begin_layout Standard
31694 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31701 \begin_inset Graphics
31702 filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
31709 \begin_layout Standard
31710 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
31716 \begin_layout Standard
31717 The review toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
31721 \begin_layout Standard
31722 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
31728 \begin_layout Standard
31729 \begin_inset Tabular
31730 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
31731 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
31732 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
31733 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
31734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
31735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31739 \begin_inset Graphics
31740 filename ../../images/changes-track.png
31741 rotateOrigin center
31750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31756 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31758 \begin_inset space ~
31761 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31763 \begin_inset space ~
31772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
31773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31777 \begin_inset Graphics
31778 filename ../../images/changes-output.png
31779 rotateOrigin center
31788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31794 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31796 \begin_inset space ~
31799 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31801 \begin_inset space ~
31805 \begin_inset space ~
31809 \begin_inset space ~
31818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
31819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31823 \begin_inset Graphics
31824 filename ../../images/change-next.png
31825 rotateOrigin center
31834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31838 Jumps to the next change
31844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
31845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31849 \begin_inset Graphics
31850 filename ../../images/change-accept.png
31851 rotateOrigin center
31860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31866 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31868 \begin_inset space ~
31871 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31873 \begin_inset space ~
31882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
31883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31887 \begin_inset Graphics
31888 filename ../../images/change-reject.png
31889 rotateOrigin center
31898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31904 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31906 \begin_inset space ~
31909 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31911 \begin_inset space ~
31920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
31921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31925 \begin_inset Graphics
31926 filename ../../images/changes-merge.png
31927 rotateOrigin center
31936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31942 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31944 \begin_inset space ~
31947 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31949 \begin_inset space ~
31958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
31959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31963 \begin_inset Graphics
31964 filename ../../images/all-changes-accept.png
31965 rotateOrigin center
31974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31980 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31982 \begin_inset space ~
31985 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31987 \begin_inset space ~
31991 \begin_inset space ~
32000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32005 \begin_inset Graphics
32006 filename ../../images/all-changes-reject.png
32007 rotateOrigin center
32016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32022 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32024 \begin_inset space ~
32027 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32029 \begin_inset space ~
32033 \begin_inset space ~
32042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32047 \begin_inset Graphics
32048 filename ../../images/note-insert.png
32049 rotateOrigin center
32058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32064 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32065 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32081 \begin_inset Graphics
32082 filename ../../images/note-next.png
32083 rotateOrigin center
32092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32098 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32100 \begin_inset space ~
32116 \begin_layout Standard
32117 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32123 \begin_layout Standard
32124 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
32125 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
32126 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
32127 the next change after the current cursor position.
32128 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
32129 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
32130 step to the next change.
32131 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
32134 \begin_layout Standard
32135 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
32136 to describe a change.
32139 \begin_layout Standard
32140 To show made changes in the output you need the LaTeX package
32145 \begin_inset Index idx
32148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32149 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
32155 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
32156 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32162 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
32165 \begin_layout Section
32166 Comparison of Documents
32167 \begin_inset Index idx
32170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32173 Comparison of documents
32181 \begin_layout Standard
32182 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
32184 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32188 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
32190 In the comparison dialog you can select with the option
32193 \begin_inset space ~
32197 \begin_inset space ~
32201 \begin_inset space ~
32206 from which document LyX should take the document settings for the resulting
32211 \begin_inset space ~
32215 \begin_inset space ~
32219 \begin_inset space ~
32223 \begin_inset space ~
32227 \begin_inset space ~
32231 \begin_inset space ~
32236 enables the change tracking option
32239 \begin_inset space ~
32243 \begin_inset space ~
32247 \begin_inset space ~
32252 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
32255 \begin_layout Section
32256 International Support
32257 \begin_inset Index idx
32260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32261 International support
32269 \begin_layout Standard
32270 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
32271 For some non-western languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain
32272 how to set up LyX to use them:
32273 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32275 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew"
32282 \begin_layout Standard
32283 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
32284 \begin_inset space ~
32288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32290 reference "sub:Special-Character"
32297 \begin_layout Subsection
32299 \begin_inset Index idx
32302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32309 \begin_inset Index idx
32312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32313 Document ! Settings
32319 \begin_inset Index idx
32322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32323 Document ! Language
32331 \begin_layout Standard
32334 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32337 dialog lets you set
32339 the language and character encoding for your language.
32343 \begin_layout Standard
32344 Choose your language in the
32348 section of this dialog.
32356 \begin_layout Standard
32361 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
32366 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
32367 For details about the different encoding options see section
32368 \begin_inset space ~
32372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32374 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
32381 \begin_layout Subsection
32382 Keyboard mapping configuration
32383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32385 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32393 If you have for example a U.S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language
32394 other than English, you can use an alternate keymap.
32395 For example, if you have a U.S.-style keyboard but want to write in Italian,
32396 you can configure LyX to use an Italian keymap.
32397 The preferences dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
32399 \begin_inset space ~
32403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32405 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
32410 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
32411 which one you want to use.
32414 \begin_layout Standard
32415 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
32416 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
32417 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.S.
32418 keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
32419 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
32420 one to support the characters you want.
32421 This and many other customizations are explained in the
32428 \begin_layout Subsection
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32434 \begin_inset space ~
32438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32440 reference "cap:The-latin1-character"
32449 You should be able to enter the characters in the first eight columns directly
32453 \begin_layout Standard
32454 There are a few things you need to know about this table.
32455 Here are some of the details you'll need to bear in mind when using characters
32463 \begin_layout Itemize
32464 Even if you have selected
32470 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32473 dialog, users who have only the
32477 -fonts for LaTeX [or who have the
32481 -fonts but aren't using them] will still miss a few characters: D0, F0,
32482 DE, FE, AB, and BB – the uppercase and lowercase eth and thorn, and the
32483 french quotes won't show up.
32486 \begin_layout Standard
32487 \begin_inset Float table
32492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32493 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32498 name "cap:The-latin1-character"
32514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32516 \begin_inset Tabular
32517 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="17" columns="17">
32518 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
32519 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32520 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32521 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32522 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32523 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32524 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32525 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32526 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32527 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32528 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32529 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32530 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32531 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32532 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32533 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32534 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32535 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
32996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36948 \begin_layout Standard
36949 The following is a full list of all of the accented characters LyX can display
36951 It includes not only the accented characters from the previous table, but
36952 also the characters from
36964 \begin_layout Itemize
36973 \begin_layout Standard
36974 ¨ Ä Ë Ï Ö Ü ä ë ï ö ü ÿ
36975 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
36981 \begin_layout Standard
36982 ^ Â Ê Î Ô Û â ê î ô û
36983 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
36989 \begin_layout Standard
36990 ` À È Ì Ò Ù à è ì ò ù
36991 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
36997 \begin_layout Standard
36998 ´ Á É Í Ó Ú Ý á é í ó ú ý
36999 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37005 \begin_layout Standard
37007 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37013 \begin_layout Standard
37015 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37021 \begin_layout Standard
37023 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37030 \begin_layout Itemize
37043 \begin_layout Standard
37045 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37051 \begin_layout Standard
37053 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37059 \begin_layout Standard
37061 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37067 \begin_layout Standard
37069 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37075 \begin_layout Standard
37077 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37083 \begin_layout Standard
37085 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
37092 \begin_layout Standard
37093 All the characters above are actively supported by TeX fonts.
37094 In addition TeX allows diacritical marks on almost all characters.
37095 Also make sure you're using the
37102 \begin_layout Chapter
37105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37107 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37114 \begin_layout Standard
37115 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37116 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37117 topic inside the user's guide.
37120 \begin_layout Section
37122 \begin_inset Index idx
37125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37134 \begin_layout Standard
37139 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37142 \begin_layout Subsection
37146 \begin_layout Standard
37147 Creates a new document.
37150 \begin_layout Subsection
37154 \begin_layout Standard
37155 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37156 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37157 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37160 \begin_layout Subsection
37164 \begin_layout Standard
37168 \begin_layout Subsection
37172 \begin_layout Standard
37173 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37174 Click there on a file to open it.
37177 \begin_layout Subsection
37181 \begin_layout Standard
37182 Closes the current document.
37185 \begin_layout Subsection
37189 \begin_layout Standard
37190 Closes all opened documents.
37193 \begin_layout Subsection
37197 \begin_layout Standard
37198 Saves the actual document.
37201 \begin_layout Subsection
37205 \begin_layout Standard
37206 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37209 \begin_layout Subsection
37213 \begin_layout Standard
37214 Saves all opened documents.
37217 \begin_layout Subsection
37221 \begin_layout Standard
37222 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37225 \begin_layout Subsection
37229 \begin_layout Standard
37230 This is used when more people are working on the same document.
37231 It is described in the section
37233 Version Control in LyX
37237 Additional Features
37242 \begin_layout Subsection
37246 \begin_layout Standard
37247 You can import there files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
37248 NoWeb-files, plain text files, and comma separated, table like, text files
37249 (CSV) as a new LyX-document.
37250 The files will be imported as new LyX-document.
37253 \begin_layout Standard
37254 When using the menu entry
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37262 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37275 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37276 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37279 \begin_layout Subsection
37281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37290 \begin_layout Standard
37291 You can export your document to various file formats.
37292 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
37293 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37294 They depend on the programs found by LyX while its configuration.
37297 \begin_layout Standard
37298 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37300 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37306 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
37313 \begin_layout Description
37315 \begin_inset space ~
37322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37329 yX format of the special LyX
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37333 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37334 \begin_inset Newline newline
37337 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated to LyX.
37340 \begin_layout Description
37341 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37347 \begin_layout Description
37349 \begin_inset space ~
37352 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37358 \begin_layout Description
37359 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
37360 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37361 files paths or file names in your document.
37362 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37369 \begin_layout Description
37370 DVI DVI-format that also allows to use special characters or spaces in files
37371 paths or file names
37374 \begin_layout Description
37376 \begin_inset space ~
37383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37390 eX) DVI-format using the program
37394 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
37397 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37405 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37413 \begin_layout Description
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37418 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37422 that is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37427 \begin_layout Description
37428 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
37432 \begin_layout Description
37434 \begin_inset space ~
37438 \begin_inset space ~
37441 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37445 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37453 \begin_layout Description
37458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37466 \begin_inset space ~
37473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37480 eX) text file with the LaTeX source that it is compilable with the program
37486 \begin_layout Description
37491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37499 \begin_inset space ~
37502 (pdflatex) text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used
37503 in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37507 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37510 \begin_layout Description
37515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37526 (plain) text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used
37527 in the document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is
37535 \begin_layout Description
37540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37562 eX) text file with the LaTeX source that it is compilable with the program
37568 \begin_layout Description
37570 \begin_inset space ~
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37588 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
37589 music notation software
37594 \begin_layout Description
37599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37607 \begin_inset space ~
37611 \begin_inset space ~
37614 (zip) creates a zip-archive file that contains your document and all files
37615 that are necessary to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files,
37619 \begin_layout Description
37624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37632 \begin_inset space ~
37635 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
37636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37651 represent the version number)
37654 \begin_layout Description
37659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37666 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
37669 \begin_layout Description
37670 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37675 \begin_layout Description
37676 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
37689 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
37693 \begin_layout Description
37695 \begin_inset space ~
37698 (dvipdfm) PDF-format using the program
37702 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37705 \begin_layout Description
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37721 eX) PDF-format using the program
37725 , produces PDF-files directly
37728 \begin_layout Description
37730 \begin_inset space ~
37733 (pdflatex) PDF-format using the program
37737 , produces PDF-files directly
37740 \begin_layout Description
37742 \begin_inset space ~
37745 (ps2pdf) PDF-format using the program
37749 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37752 \begin_layout Description
37754 \begin_inset space ~
37761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37768 eX) PDF-format using the program
37772 , produces PDF-files directly
37775 \begin_layout Description
37777 \begin_inset space ~
37783 \begin_layout Description
37785 \begin_inset space ~
37789 \begin_inset space ~
37792 (ps2ascii) text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript
37793 format and then exported as text using the program
37798 \begin_layout Description
37799 Postscript PostScript format using the program
37804 \begin_layout Description
37805 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
37806 programming language
37819 it is possible to use
37826 \begin_layout Standard
37827 If one of the menu entries
37834 \begin_inset space ~
37843 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
37844 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
37845 \begin_inset space ~
37849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37851 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37856 \begin_inset Index idx
37859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37860 Reconfiguration of LyX
37868 \begin_layout Subsection
37872 \begin_layout Standard
37873 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
37874 format or send it to a printer.
37875 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
37876 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
37882 For more information have a look at section
37883 \begin_inset space ~
37887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37889 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
37896 \begin_layout Subsection
37900 \begin_layout Standard
37901 This menu entry will only appear when you have a fax program installed (on
37902 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
37903 prefix, see section
37904 \begin_inset space ~
37908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37910 reference "sec:Paths"
37915 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37924 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37925 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
37926 \begin_inset space ~
37930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37932 reference "sub:Converters"
37939 \begin_layout Subsection
37940 New and Close Window
37943 \begin_layout Standard
37944 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
37947 \begin_layout Subsection
37951 \begin_layout Standard
37952 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37955 \begin_layout Section
37957 \begin_inset Index idx
37960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37969 \begin_layout Subsection
37973 \begin_layout Standard
37974 Described in section
37975 \begin_inset space ~
37979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37981 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37988 \begin_layout Subsection
37989 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37992 \begin_layout Standard
37993 Described in section
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38000 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38007 \begin_layout Subsection
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38012 Selects the whole document.
38015 \begin_layout Subsection
38016 Find & Replace (Quick)
38019 \begin_layout Standard
38020 Described in section
38021 \begin_inset space ~
38025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38027 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38034 \begin_layout Subsection
38035 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38038 \begin_layout Standard
38039 Described in section
38040 \begin_inset space ~
38044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38046 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38053 \begin_layout Subsection
38054 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38057 \begin_layout Standard
38058 This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph
38062 \begin_layout Subsection
38066 \begin_layout Standard
38067 Described in section
38068 \begin_inset space ~
38072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38074 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38081 \begin_layout Subsection
38083 \begin_inset Index idx
38086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38087 Paragraph ! Settings
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38096 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38097 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently.
38100 \begin_layout Standard
38101 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38102 have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the
38104 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38110 \begin_inset space ~
38118 \begin_layout Subsection
38119 Table Settings and Math
38122 \begin_layout Standard
38123 These two menus are only fully active when the cursor is inside a table
38125 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
38126 The properties of tables are described in section
38127 \begin_inset space ~
38131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38133 reference "sec:Tables"
38137 , the properties of formulas in chapter
38138 \begin_inset space ~
38142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38144 reference "cha:Mathematical-Formulas"
38151 \begin_layout Subsection
38152 Increase / Decrease List Depth
38155 \begin_layout Standard
38156 These menu entries are only active when the cursor is in an environment
38157 that can be nested.
38158 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38159 \begin_inset space ~
38163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38165 reference "sec:Nesting"
38170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38172 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
38179 \begin_layout Section
38181 \begin_inset Index idx
38184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38193 \begin_layout Standard
38198 menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual
38199 document with an external program.
38200 The menu entries for the viewing formats are not the same on all installations
38201 — it depends on the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured.
38202 All possible formats are formats listed in section
38203 \begin_inset space ~
38207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38209 reference "sub:Export"
38214 You should at least see the menu entries
38221 \begin_inset space ~
38227 If one of the two is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
38228 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
38229 \begin_inset space ~
38233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38235 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38240 \begin_inset Index idx
38243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38244 Reconfiguration of LyX
38252 \begin_layout Standard
38253 Invoking a menu will start a viewer program.
38254 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
38255 \begin_inset space ~
38259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38261 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38266 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
38269 \begin_layout Standard
38270 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
38273 At the bottom of the
38277 menu the opened documents are listed.
38280 \begin_layout Subsection
38281 Open/Close all Insets
38284 \begin_layout Standard
38285 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38288 \begin_layout Subsection
38289 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38292 \begin_layout Standard
38293 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38296 \begin_layout Standard
38297 Math macros are described in the
38304 \begin_layout Subsection
38308 \begin_layout Standard
38309 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38311 \begin_inset space ~
38315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38317 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38324 \begin_layout Subsection
38328 \begin_layout Standard
38329 Opens a window showing console messages.
38330 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
38331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38334 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38335 while LaTeX is processing the document,
38338 \begin_layout Subsection
38342 \begin_layout Standard
38343 This menu entry generates the output you have specified as default output
38344 format either in the preferences (see sec.
38345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38351 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38355 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
38356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38362 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38366 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
38367 The default output format is
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38378 \begin_layout Subsection
38379 View (Other Formats)
38382 \begin_layout Standard
38383 With this submenu, you can view your document in alternative output formats.
38386 \begin_layout Subsection
38390 \begin_layout Standard
38391 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
38392 the default output format as described in the previous section) without
38393 opening a new viewer window.
38396 \begin_layout Subsection
38397 Update (Other Formats)
38400 \begin_layout Standard
38401 With this submenu, you can update the view of alternative output formats
38402 of your document without opening a new viewer window.
38405 \begin_layout Subsection
38406 View Master Document
38409 \begin_layout Standard
38410 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38426 \begin_inset space ~
38431 manual for more information on this topic).
38432 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
38433 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
38438 generates the output of the whole book, while
38442 will just output the chapter alone.
38445 \begin_layout Standard
38446 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38447 in the preferences (see sec.
38448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38454 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38458 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
38459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38465 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38472 \begin_layout Subsection
38473 Update Master Document
38476 \begin_layout Standard
38477 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38493 \begin_inset space ~
38498 manual for more information on this topic).
38499 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
38500 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
38503 \begin_layout Standard
38504 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38505 in the preferences (see sec.
38506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38512 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38516 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
38517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38523 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38530 \begin_layout Subsection
38534 \begin_layout Standard
38535 This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally.
38536 This allows you to view documents the same time to compare them, or to
38537 view the same document, but at different positions.
38538 You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3
38539 or more documents at the same time.
38540 To return to an unsplit view, use the menu
38547 \begin_layout Subsection
38551 \begin_layout Standard
38552 Closes a split view.
38555 \begin_layout Subsection
38559 \begin_layout Standard
38560 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38561 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38562 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
38563 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38564 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38567 \begin_layout Subsection
38569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38571 name "sub:Toolbars"
38576 \begin_inset Index idx
38579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38588 \begin_layout Standard
38589 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38590 All toolbars and the
38593 \begin_inset space ~
38598 can be turned on and off.
38603 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38615 \begin_inset space ~
38624 toolbars can be additionally set to the state
38628 that is denoted in the menu with the suffix
38635 \begin_layout Standard
38640 state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the
38644 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38645 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38646 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown when change tracking
38647 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown when the cursor
38648 is inside a formula or table, respectively.
38651 \begin_layout Standard
38652 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38653 \begin_inset space ~
38657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38659 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38666 \begin_layout Section
38668 \begin_inset Index idx
38671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38680 \begin_layout Subsection
38684 \begin_layout Standard
38685 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38686 \begin_inset space ~
38690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38692 reference "cha:Mathematical-Formulas"
38703 \begin_layout Subsection
38705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38707 name "sub:Special-Character"
38714 \begin_layout Standard
38715 Here you can insert the following characters:
38718 \begin_layout Description
38719 Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system.
38720 Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available
38721 characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
38722 \begin_inset Newline newline
38726 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38734 Not all characters will be visible in the
38738 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38746 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
38750 ) can display every character.
38758 \begin_layout Description
38759 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
38763 \begin_layout Description
38765 \begin_inset space ~
38769 \begin_inset space ~
38772 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section
38773 \begin_inset space ~
38777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38779 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
38786 \begin_layout Description
38788 \begin_inset space ~
38791 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the
38794 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38804 \begin_layout Description
38806 \begin_inset space ~
38809 Quote Inserts this quote:
38810 \begin_inset Quotes ers
38816 \begin_layout Description
38818 \begin_inset space ~
38821 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
38825 \begin_layout Description
38827 \begin_inset space ~
38830 Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
38834 \begin_layout Description
38836 \begin_inset space ~
38839 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
38843 \begin_layout Description
38845 \begin_inset space ~
38849 \begin_inset Index idx
38852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38859 \begin_inset Index idx
38862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38863 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38868 Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset.
38869 Here you can insert commands to create IPA phonetic symbols.
38870 For this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
38875 \begin_inset Index idx
38878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38879 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
38885 \begin_inset Newline newline
38888 For more information about this feature we refer to the documentation of
38892 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38900 and this Wiki-page:
38901 \begin_inset Newline newline
38905 \begin_inset Flex URL
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38910 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX
38918 \begin_layout Subsection
38922 \begin_layout Standard
38923 Here you can insert the following format constructs:
38926 \begin_layout Description
38927 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38928 \begin_inset script superscript
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38939 \begin_layout Description
38940 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38941 \begin_inset script subscript
38943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38952 \begin_layout Description
38954 \begin_inset space ~
38957 Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section
38958 \begin_inset space ~
38962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38964 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
38971 \begin_layout Description
38973 \begin_inset space ~
38976 Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section
38977 \begin_inset space ~
38981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38983 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
38990 \begin_layout Description
38992 \begin_inset space ~
38995 Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section
38996 \begin_inset space ~
39000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39002 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
39009 \begin_layout Description
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39014 Space Inserts horizontal space, see section
39015 \begin_inset space ~
39019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39021 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
39028 \begin_layout Description
39030 \begin_inset space ~
39033 Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section
39034 \begin_inset space ~
39038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39040 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
39047 \begin_layout Description
39049 \begin_inset space ~
39052 Space Inserts vertical space, see section
39053 \begin_inset space ~
39057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39059 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
39066 \begin_layout Description
39067 Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section
39068 \begin_inset space ~
39072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39074 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
39081 \begin_layout Description
39083 \begin_inset space ~
39086 Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section
39087 \begin_inset space ~
39091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39093 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
39100 \begin_layout Description
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39105 Break Inserts a ligature break, see section
39106 \begin_inset space ~
39110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39112 reference "sub:Ligatures"
39119 \begin_layout Description
39121 \begin_inset space ~
39125 \begin_inset space ~
39128 Break Inserts a forced line break, see section
39129 \begin_inset space ~
39133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39135 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39142 \begin_layout Description
39144 \begin_inset space ~
39147 Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken
39148 text line to the page border, see section
39149 \begin_inset space ~
39153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39155 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39162 \begin_layout Description
39164 \begin_inset space ~
39167 Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section
39168 \begin_inset space ~
39172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39174 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39181 \begin_layout Description
39183 \begin_inset space ~
39186 Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken
39187 text page to the page border, described in section
39188 \begin_inset space ~
39192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39194 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39201 \begin_layout Description
39203 \begin_inset space ~
39206 Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section
39207 \begin_inset space ~
39211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39213 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39220 \begin_layout Description
39222 \begin_inset space ~
39226 \begin_inset space ~
39229 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39236 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39243 \begin_layout Subsection
39247 \begin_layout Standard
39248 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39249 The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39257 reference "sec:toc"
39262 The index list is described in section
39263 \begin_inset space ~
39267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39269 reference "sec:Index"
39273 , the nomenclature in section
39274 \begin_inset space ~
39278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39280 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39284 and the BibTeX bibliography in section
39285 \begin_inset space ~
39289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39291 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
39298 \begin_layout Subsection
39302 \begin_layout Standard
39303 To insert floats, described in section
39304 \begin_inset space ~
39308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39310 reference "sec:Floats"
39317 \begin_layout Subsection
39321 \begin_layout Standard
39322 To insert notes, described in section
39323 \begin_inset space ~
39327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39329 reference "sec:Notes"
39336 \begin_layout Subsection
39340 \begin_layout Standard
39341 Inserts branch insets as described in section
39342 \begin_inset space ~
39346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39348 reference "sec:Branches"
39355 \begin_layout Subsection
39359 \begin_layout Standard
39360 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39361 Such insets only exist when they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39363 An example is the document class
39364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39371 with three custom insets.
39374 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39380 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39383 \begin_layout Subsection
39385 \begin_inset Index idx
39388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 \begin_layout Standard
39398 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other LyX
39399 files in your document.
39400 How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter
39407 \begin_inset space ~
39415 \begin_layout Subsection
39417 \begin_inset Index idx
39420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39429 \begin_layout Standard
39430 Inserts a minipage box that is described section
39431 \begin_inset space ~
39435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39437 reference "sec:Minipages"
39442 All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter
39449 \begin_inset space ~
39457 \begin_layout Subsection
39461 \begin_layout Standard
39462 Inserts a citation as described in section
39463 \begin_inset space ~
39467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39469 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39476 \begin_layout Subsection
39480 \begin_layout Standard
39481 Inserts a cross-reference as described in section
39482 \begin_inset space ~
39486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39488 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39495 \begin_layout Subsection
39499 \begin_layout Standard
39500 Inserts a label as described in section
39501 \begin_inset space ~
39505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39507 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39514 \begin_layout Subsection
39516 \begin_inset Index idx
39519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39526 \begin_inset Index idx
39529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39530 Longtables ! Caption
39538 \begin_layout Standard
39539 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
39540 Floats are described in section
39541 \begin_inset space ~
39545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39547 reference "sec:Floats"
39551 , captions in longtables are described in the section
39558 \begin_inset space ~
39566 \begin_layout Subsection
39570 \begin_layout Standard
39571 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39572 \begin_inset space ~
39576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39578 reference "sec:Index"
39585 \begin_layout Subsection
39589 \begin_layout Standard
39590 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39591 \begin_inset space ~
39595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39597 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39604 \begin_layout Subsection
39608 \begin_layout Standard
39610 Tables are described in section
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39617 reference "sec:Tables"
39624 \begin_layout Subsection
39628 \begin_layout Standard
39630 Graphics are described in section
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39637 reference "sec:Graphics"
39644 \begin_layout Subsection
39648 \begin_layout Standard
39649 Inserts an URL as described in section
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39656 reference "sub:URLs"
39663 \begin_layout Subsection
39667 \begin_layout Standard
39668 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39669 \begin_inset space ~
39673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39675 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
39682 \begin_layout Subsection
39686 \begin_layout Standard
39687 Inserts a footnote, see section
39688 \begin_inset space ~
39692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39694 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39701 \begin_layout Subsection
39705 \begin_layout Standard
39706 Inserts a marginal note, see section
39707 \begin_inset space ~
39711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39713 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39720 \begin_layout Subsection
39724 \begin_layout Standard
39725 Inserts a short title, see section
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39732 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39739 \begin_layout Subsection
39743 \begin_layout Standard
39744 Inserts a TeX Code box, see section
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39751 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39758 \begin_layout Subsection
39760 \begin_inset Index idx
39763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39772 \begin_layout Standard
39773 Inserts a program listings box.
39774 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39776 Program Code Listings
39781 \begin_inset space ~
39789 \begin_layout Subsection
39793 \begin_layout Standard
39794 Inserts the actual date.
39795 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39797 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39813 \begin_layout Section
39815 \begin_inset Index idx
39818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39827 \begin_layout Standard
39828 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39829 \begin_inset space ~
39832 of the current document.
39833 This allows you to navigate easily through you document.
39836 \begin_layout Subsection
39840 \begin_layout Standard
39841 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39842 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39848 \begin_inset space \space{}
39852 \begin_inset space ~
39856 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39857 \begin_inset space ~
39860 2.5 and use the menu
39863 \begin_inset space ~
39867 \begin_inset space ~
39874 \begin_inset space ~
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39884 \begin_inset space ~
39890 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39894 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39900 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39906 \begin_layout Standard
39907 You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39908 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39911 \begin_layout Subsection
39912 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39915 \begin_layout Standard
39916 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current
39920 \begin_layout Subsection
39924 \begin_layout Standard
39925 Only active when the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39926 Sets the cursor before the referenced label, the same as if you right-click
39927 on a cross-reference box.
39930 \begin_layout Subsection
39934 \begin_layout Standard
39935 This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part
39936 in the output, see section
39939 \begin_inset space ~
39947 \begin_inset space ~
39952 manual for a detailed description.
39955 \begin_layout Section
39957 \begin_inset Index idx
39960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39969 \begin_layout Subsection
39973 \begin_layout Standard
39974 Change Tracking is described in section
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39981 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39988 \begin_layout Subsection
39993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40003 \begin_layout Standard
40004 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
40006 It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program.
40009 \begin_layout Standard
40010 Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background.
40015 will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
40018 \begin_layout Subsection
40022 \begin_layout Standard
40023 Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section
40024 \begin_inset space ~
40028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40030 reference "sec:Navigating"
40035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40037 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
40044 \begin_layout Subsection
40045 Start Appendix Here
40048 \begin_layout Standard
40049 This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor
40050 position as described in section
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40057 reference "sec:Appendices"
40064 \begin_layout Subsection
40068 \begin_layout Standard
40069 Un/compresses the current document.
40072 \begin_layout Subsection
40076 \begin_layout Standard
40077 The document settings are described in appendix
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40084 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40091 \begin_layout Section
40093 \begin_inset Index idx
40096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40105 \begin_layout Subsection
40109 \begin_layout Standard
40110 Spell checking is explained in section
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40117 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40124 \begin_layout Subsection
40128 \begin_layout Standard
40129 The thesaurus is described in section
40130 \begin_inset space ~
40134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40136 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40143 \begin_layout Subsection
40145 \begin_inset Index idx
40148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40155 \begin_inset Index idx
40158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40167 \begin_layout Standard
40168 Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted
40172 \begin_layout Subsection
40174 \begin_inset Index idx
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 \begin_layout Standard
40187 Shows you a list of the classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-system.
40190 \begin_layout Subsection
40192 \begin_inset Index idx
40195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40196 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
40200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40207 Reconfiguration of LyX
40211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40224 \begin_inset Index idx
40227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40228 Reconfiguration of LyX
40236 \begin_layout Standard
40237 This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages
40238 and needed programs it needs; see also section
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40245 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40252 \begin_layout Subsection
40256 \begin_layout Standard
40257 The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix
40258 \begin_inset space ~
40262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40264 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40271 \begin_layout Section
40273 \begin_inset Index idx
40276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40285 \begin_layout Standard
40286 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
40288 Is a file not available in this language, the English version will be listed.
40291 \begin_layout Standard
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40300 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
40301 found by LyX (see also section
40302 \begin_inset space ~
40306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40308 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40315 \begin_layout Section
40317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40319 name "sec:Toolbars"
40326 \begin_layout Standard
40327 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40334 reference "sub:Toolbars"
40341 \begin_layout Standard
40342 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40343 This is described in the
40345 Additional Features
40350 \begin_layout Subsection
40352 \begin_inset Index idx
40355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40364 \begin_layout Standard
40365 \begin_inset Graphics
40366 filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40374 \begin_layout Standard
40375 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40381 \begin_layout Standard
40382 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40399 \begin_inset Note Note
40402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40403 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40408 manual for more information.
40416 \begin_layout Standard
40417 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40423 \begin_layout Standard
40424 \begin_inset Tabular
40425 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40426 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40427 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40428 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40434 \begin_inset Graphics
40435 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40449 pull-down box for the paragraph environments
40462 \begin_layout Standard
40463 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40469 \begin_layout Standard
40471 \begin_inset Tabular
40472 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="2">
40473 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40474 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40475 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40499 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40529 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40536 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40559 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40575 arg "dialog-show print"
40583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40589 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40605 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40619 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40649 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40679 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40709 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40739 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40769 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40785 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
40793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40799 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40823 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
40831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40837 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40838 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40866 Emphasize text, function of the
40868 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40870 \begin_inset space ~
40881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40902 Set text to noun style, function of the
40904 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40926 arg "textstyle-apply"
40934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40938 Formats text using the current settings in the
40940 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40976 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40977 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40997 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41011 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41025 arg "tabular-insert"
41033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41039 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41055 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41067 Toggle outline window on/off,
41069 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41085 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41097 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41112 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41124 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41137 \begin_layout Subsection
41139 \begin_inset Index idx
41142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41151 \begin_layout Standard
41152 \begin_inset Graphics
41153 filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41161 \begin_layout Standard
41162 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41168 \begin_layout Standard
41169 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41173 \begin_layout Standard
41174 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41180 \begin_layout Standard
41181 \begin_inset Tabular
41182 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41183 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41184 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41185 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41222 arg "layout Enumerate"
41230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41249 arg "layout Itemize"
41257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41294 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41303 arg "layout Description"
41311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41330 arg "depth-increment"
41338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41344 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41346 \begin_inset space ~
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41368 arg "depth-decrement"
41376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41382 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41406 arg "float-insert figure"
41414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41420 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41421 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41437 arg "float-insert table"
41445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41451 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41452 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41482 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41498 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41512 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41528 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41542 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41572 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41574 \begin_inset space ~
41583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41592 arg "nomencl-insert"
41600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41606 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41626 arg "footnote-insert"
41634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41640 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41647 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41656 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41670 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41672 \begin_inset space ~
41681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41704 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41705 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41725 arg "box-insert Frameless"
41733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41739 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41769 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41799 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41816 \begin_inset space ~
41825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41834 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
41842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41848 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41849 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41865 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
41873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41879 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41880 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41882 \begin_inset space ~
41891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41900 arg "dialog-show character"
41908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41914 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41916 \begin_inset space ~
41925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41934 arg "layout-paragraph"
41942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41948 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41950 \begin_inset space ~
41959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41968 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41982 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41996 \begin_layout Subsection
41997 View / Update Toolbar
41998 \begin_inset Index idx
42001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42002 Toolbar ! View / Update
42010 \begin_layout Standard
42011 \begin_inset Graphics
42012 filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42019 \begin_layout Standard
42020 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42026 \begin_layout Standard
42027 The view / update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the
42031 \begin_layout Standard
42032 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42038 \begin_layout Standard
42039 \begin_inset Tabular
42040 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42041 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42042 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42043 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42067 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42083 arg "buffer-update"
42091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42097 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42104 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42113 arg "master-buffer-view"
42121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42127 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42143 arg "master-buffer-update"
42151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42157 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42159 \begin_inset space ~
42168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42177 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42191 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42192 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42193 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42194 Synchronize with Output
42200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42205 \begin_inset Graphics
42206 filename ../../images/view-others.png
42208 groupId toolbarbuttons
42219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42225 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42226 View (Other Formats)
42232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42237 \begin_inset Graphics
42238 filename ../../images/update-others.png
42240 groupId toolbarbuttons
42249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42255 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42256 Update (Other Formats)
42269 \begin_layout Standard
42270 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42274 \begin_layout Subsection
42278 \begin_layout Standard
42279 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42280 \begin_inset space ~
42284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42286 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42290 , the table toolbar
42291 \begin_inset Index idx
42294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42303 \begin_inset space ~
42308 manual, the math macro toolbar
42309 \begin_inset Index idx
42312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42325 \begin_layout Chapter
42326 The Document Settings
42327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42329 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42334 \begin_inset Index idx
42337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42338 Document ! Settings
42346 \begin_layout Standard
42347 The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the
42348 whole document and is called with the menu
42350 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42354 You can save your document settings as default with th
42356 e Save as Document Defaults
42358 button in the dialog.
42359 This will create a template named
42363 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
42367 \begin_layout Standard
42368 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following.
42371 \begin_layout Section
42375 \begin_layout Standard
42376 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42378 Document classes are described in section
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42385 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42390 Some classes use some class options by default.
42391 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42395 and you can decide to use them or not.
42396 If you don't exactly know what the default class options are for, it is
42397 recommended not to touch them.
42402 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42407 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
42408 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42414 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42415 \begin_inset Newline newline
42420 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42423 \begin_inset Newline newline
42426 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see sec.
42427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42431 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42433 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42445 \begin_layout Standard
42446 Specifying a master document is necessary when the current document is a
42447 child or subdocument.
42448 This master document will be used by LyX when the child document is opened
42449 without its master.
42450 This way child documents are always compilable.
42451 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42458 \begin_inset space ~
42466 \begin_layout Standard
42467 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
42477 \begin_inset Index idx
42480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42481 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
42487 \begin_inset Index idx
42490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42491 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
42496 for cross-references, see sec.
42497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42503 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42510 \begin_layout Section
42514 \begin_layout Standard
42515 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42516 Please refer to the section
42519 \begin_inset space ~
42527 \begin_inset space ~
42532 manual for details.
42535 \begin_layout Section
42539 \begin_layout Standard
42540 Modules are explained in section
42541 \begin_inset space ~
42545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42547 reference "sub:Modules"
42554 \begin_layout Section
42558 \begin_layout Standard
42560 \begin_inset space ~
42564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42566 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
42573 \begin_layout Section
42577 \begin_layout Standard
42578 The document font settings are described in section
42579 \begin_inset space ~
42583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42585 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42592 \begin_layout Section
42596 \begin_layout Standard
42597 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical
42599 The line spacing and the number of text columns can here also be specified.
42603 \begin_layout Standard
42604 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen.
42605 That is impractical, often unreadable, and not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
42606 However, it will be as you specified it in the output.
42609 \begin_layout Section
42613 \begin_layout Standard
42614 A description of this menu is given in section
42615 \begin_inset space ~
42619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42621 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
42626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42628 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
42635 \begin_layout Section
42639 \begin_layout Standard
42640 Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section
42641 \begin_inset space ~
42645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42647 reference "sub:Margins"
42654 \begin_layout Section
42656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42658 name "sec:Language-encodings"
42663 \begin_inset Index idx
42666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42667 Language ! Encoding
42675 \begin_layout Standard
42676 The document language and quote styles are set here.
42677 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
42678 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
42679 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
42680 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
42681 known for a particular character).
42685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42686 The known commands are defined in a text file (
42691 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
42696 manual for details.
42704 \begin_layout Standard
42705 If you use the option
42709 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
42710 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
42711 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
42712 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
42713 exactly one encoding.
42714 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
42717 \begin_layout Standard
42718 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
42719 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
42720 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode,
42721 for that matter), choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
42722 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
42723 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
42728 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
42729 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
42730 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
42731 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
42732 engines to standard LaTeX.
42733 Both engines support Unicode natively.
42734 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
42737 \begin_inset space ~
42744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42756 \begin_inset space ~
42763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42775 \begin_inset space ~
42781 \begin_inset space ~
42785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42787 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
42792 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
42796 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
42799 \begin_layout Standard
42803 \begin_inset space ~
42808 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
42810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42818 The possible settings are:
42821 \begin_layout Description
42822 Default is the package
42827 \begin_inset Index idx
42830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42831 LaTeX-packages ! babel
42839 \begin_layout Description
42840 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
42841 format you will use.
42842 For example for the XeTeX formats the package
42847 \begin_inset Index idx
42850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42851 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
42856 will be used instead of
42863 \begin_layout Description
42865 \begin_inset space ~
42868 Babel uses in every case
42875 \begin_layout Description
42876 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
42877 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
42881 (for German texts), type in
42884 \begin_inset Newline newline
42889 usepackage{ngerman}
42892 \begin_layout Description
42893 None will not use a language package.
42894 This necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
42897 \begin_layout Standard
42898 Here is a list with the important encodings:
42901 \begin_layout Description
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42907 \begin_inset space ~
42911 \begin_inset space ~
42918 , but the LaTeX-package
42923 \begin_inset Index idx
42926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42927 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
42933 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
42934 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
42935 languages in TeX code.
42938 \begin_layout Description
42939 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
42940 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
42941 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
42944 \begin_layout Description
42946 \begin_inset space ~
42950 \begin_inset space ~
42953 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
42956 \begin_layout Description
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42962 \begin_inset space ~
42965 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
42968 \begin_layout Description
42970 \begin_inset space ~
42973 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
42976 \begin_layout Description
42978 \begin_inset space ~
42982 \begin_inset space ~
42985 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
42986 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
42989 \begin_layout Description
42991 \begin_inset space ~
42995 \begin_inset space ~
42998 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43002 \begin_layout Description
43004 \begin_inset space ~
43008 \begin_inset space ~
43011 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43012 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43015 \begin_layout Description
43017 \begin_inset space ~
43021 \begin_inset space ~
43025 \begin_inset space ~
43028 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43029 \begin_inset space ~
43035 \begin_layout Description
43037 \begin_inset space ~
43041 \begin_inset space ~
43045 \begin_inset space ~
43048 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43049 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43052 \begin_layout Description
43054 \begin_inset space ~
43058 \begin_inset space ~
43061 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43062 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43063 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43064 \begin_inset space ~
43068 \begin_inset space ~
43074 \begin_layout Description
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43080 \begin_inset space ~
43083 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43084 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43085 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
43086 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43087 \begin_inset space ~
43091 \begin_inset space ~
43097 \begin_layout Description
43099 \begin_inset space ~
43103 \begin_inset space ~
43106 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43109 \begin_layout Description
43111 \begin_inset space ~
43115 \begin_inset space ~
43118 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43121 \begin_layout Description
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43127 \begin_inset space ~
43130 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43133 \begin_layout Description
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43138 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43141 \begin_layout Description
43143 \begin_inset space ~
43146 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43149 \begin_layout Description
43151 \begin_inset space ~
43155 \begin_inset space ~
43158 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43161 \begin_layout Description
43163 \begin_inset space ~
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43173 \begin_layout Description
43175 \begin_inset space ~
43179 \begin_inset space ~
43182 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43185 \begin_layout Description
43187 \begin_inset space ~
43191 \begin_inset space ~
43197 \begin_layout Description
43199 \begin_inset space ~
43203 \begin_inset space ~
43206 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
43211 \begin_inset Index idx
43214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43215 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
43220 , when using this, set the document language to
43225 \begin_layout Description
43227 \begin_inset space ~
43231 \begin_inset space ~
43234 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
43238 , when using this, set the document language to
43241 \begin_inset space ~
43247 \begin_layout Description
43249 \begin_inset space ~
43253 \begin_inset space ~
43256 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
43261 \begin_inset Index idx
43264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43265 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
43270 , when using this, set the document language to
43275 \begin_layout Description
43277 \begin_inset space ~
43281 \begin_inset space ~
43284 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
43288 , when using this, set the document language to
43293 \begin_layout Description
43295 \begin_inset space ~
43299 \begin_inset space ~
43302 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
43306 , when using this, set the document language to
43311 \begin_layout Description
43313 \begin_inset space ~
43316 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43319 \begin_layout Description
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43325 \begin_inset space ~
43329 \begin_inset space ~
43332 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43335 \begin_layout Description
43337 \begin_inset space ~
43341 \begin_inset space ~
43345 \begin_inset space ~
43348 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43349 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43350 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43353 \begin_layout Description
43355 \begin_inset space ~
43359 \begin_inset space ~
43365 \begin_layout Description
43367 \begin_inset space ~
43371 \begin_inset space ~
43374 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43375 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43378 \begin_layout Description
43380 \begin_inset space ~
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43387 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
43392 \begin_inset Index idx
43395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43396 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
43401 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43404 \begin_layout Description
43406 \begin_inset space ~
43410 \begin_inset space ~
43413 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43421 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
43426 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
43428 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43431 \begin_layout Description
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43440 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
43445 \begin_inset Index idx
43448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43449 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
43454 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43457 \begin_layout Description
43459 \begin_inset space ~
43462 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
43467 \begin_inset Index idx
43470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43471 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
43477 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43481 \begin_layout Description
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_inset space ~
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43494 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_layout Description
43503 \begin_inset space ~
43507 \begin_inset space ~
43511 \begin_inset space ~
43514 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43515 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43516 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43520 \begin_layout Description
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43526 \begin_inset space ~
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43533 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43534 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43537 \begin_layout Standard
43538 Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the
43541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43542 LatexCommand formatted
43543 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
43547 for more information on the language package.
43550 \begin_layout Section
43552 \begin_inset Index idx
43555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43562 \begin_inset Index idx
43565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43574 \begin_layout Standard
43575 Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43580 out notes (default: light grey).
43585 sets the color back to the default.
43588 \begin_layout Standard
43589 You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white)
43591 \begin_inset space ~
43594 boxes (default: red).
43597 \begin_layout Standard
43598 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43602 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43607 out note appears blue in the output.)
43615 \begin_layout Standard
43616 Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option
43619 \begin_inset space ~
43624 in the document settings under
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43632 , you probably also need to change the link font color by using
43635 \begin_inset space ~
43643 \begin_inset space ~
43649 For example the option
43652 \begin_layout Standard
43658 \begin_layout Standard
43659 sets the link text color to black.
43660 For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package
43665 \begin_inset Index idx
43668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43669 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
43675 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43684 \begin_layout Standard
43685 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
43691 \begin_layout Standard
43692 You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every
43693 page in your document if you use these commands as TeX
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43697 Code behind a forced page break:
43700 \begin_layout Itemize
43701 For the page color:
43702 \begin_inset Newline newline
43709 pagecolor{color name}
43712 \begin_layout Itemize
43713 For the text color:
43714 \begin_inset Newline newline
43724 \begin_layout Standard
43725 The color name can hereby be one of these:
43758 \begin_inset Newline newline
43761 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the
43765 \begin_layout Itemize
43766 For the page background color:
43767 \begin_inset Newline newline
43772 page_backgroundcolor
43775 \begin_layout Itemize
43776 For the main text color:
43777 \begin_inset Newline newline
43785 \begin_layout Itemize
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43790 box background color:
43791 \begin_inset Newline newline
43799 \begin_layout Itemize
43801 \begin_inset space ~
43804 out note text color:
43805 \begin_inset Newline newline
43813 \begin_layout Standard
43814 How to define and use custom colors, see section
43817 \begin_inset space ~
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43833 \begin_layout Section
43837 \begin_layout Standard
43838 You can adjust here the numbering depth of section headings and the section
43839 depth in the table of contents as described in section
43840 \begin_inset space ~
43844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43846 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
43853 \begin_layout Section
43857 \begin_layout Standard
43858 Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages
43863 \begin_inset Index idx
43866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43867 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
43877 \begin_inset Index idx
43880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43881 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
43887 You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package
43892 \begin_inset Index idx
43895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43896 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
43901 and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being
43903 For a further description see section
43904 \begin_inset space ~
43908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43910 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43917 \begin_layout Section
43921 \begin_layout Standard
43922 Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated
43923 and you can define additional indexes.
43924 Please refer to section
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43931 reference "sec:Index"
43938 \begin_layout Section
43942 \begin_layout Standard
43943 The PDF properties are explained in section
43944 \begin_inset space ~
43948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43950 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
43957 \begin_layout Section
43961 \begin_layout Standard
43962 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
43967 \begin_inset Index idx
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43971 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
43981 \begin_inset Index idx
43984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43985 LaTeX-packages ! esint
43995 \begin_inset Index idx
43998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43999 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
44009 \begin_inset Index idx
44012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44013 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
44018 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44021 \begin_layout Description
44022 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
44023 ensure that you have enabled
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44034 \begin_layout Description
44035 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44038 \begin_inset space ~
44050 \begin_layout Description
44051 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44062 \begin_layout Description
44063 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44065 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44074 \begin_layout Section
44078 \begin_layout Standard
44079 The float placement options are described in section
44082 \begin_inset space ~
44090 \begin_inset space ~
44098 \begin_layout Section
44102 \begin_layout Standard
44103 The listings settings are explained in chapter
44105 Program Code Listings
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44118 \begin_layout Section
44122 \begin_layout Standard
44123 Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels.
44124 The itemize environment is described in section
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44131 reference "sec:Itemize"
44138 \begin_layout Section
44142 \begin_layout Standard
44143 Branches are described in section
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44150 reference "sec:Branches"
44157 \begin_layout Section
44159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44161 name "sec:Doc-Output"
44168 \begin_layout Standard
44169 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
44172 \begin_layout Description
44174 \begin_inset space ~
44178 \begin_inset space ~
44181 Format: The format that is used when you hit
44182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44201 View Master Document
44202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44209 Update Master Document
44210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44217 menu or the toolbar.
44218 The default is set in
44220 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44221 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44230 LatexCommand formatted
44231 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44238 \begin_layout Description
44240 \begin_inset space ~
44244 \begin_inset space ~
44247 Output settings for the menu
44249 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44257 For a detailed description see section
44259 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44264 \begin_inset space ~
44272 \begin_layout Description
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44278 \begin_inset space ~
44281 Options settings for the export format
44289 \begin_inset space ~
44294 will assure that the output follows exactly version
44295 \begin_inset space ~
44298 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
44302 \begin_inset space ~
44307 settings are described in detail in section
44309 Math Output in XHTML
44314 \begin_inset space ~
44320 The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output.
44323 \begin_layout Section
44328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44338 \begin_layout Standard
44339 In this text field are entered commands to load special LaTeX-packages or
44340 to define LaTeX-commands.
44341 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
44342 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
44346 \begin_layout Standard
44347 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
44348 \begin_inset space ~
44352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44354 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
44361 \begin_layout Chapter
44367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44369 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44374 \begin_inset Index idx
44377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44386 \begin_layout Standard
44387 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
44389 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44393 It has the following submenus.
44396 \begin_layout Section
44400 \begin_layout Subsection
44404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44405 User Interface File
44406 \begin_inset Index idx
44409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44410 Customization ! of toolbars
44416 \begin_inset Index idx
44419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44420 Customization ! of menus
44428 \begin_layout Standard
44429 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44437 You have to restart LyX before the change of the user interface file take
44446 \begin_layout Standard
44447 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
44448 interface (ui) file.
44449 An ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
44450 The toolbar buttons and menu entries are specified in the files
44459 Both files are loaded by the
44464 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these
44465 files and edit the entries.
44468 \begin_layout Standard
44469 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: The
44481 entries must be ended with an explicit
44506 and in the case of the
44507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44519 The syntax for the entries is:
44522 \begin_layout Standard
44523 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44551 \begin_layout Standard
44553 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44556 All LyX-functions are listed in the menu
44558 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44560 \begin_inset space ~
44568 \begin_layout Standard
44569 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44575 \begin_layout Standard
44576 An example: Assuming you use the menu
44578 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44581 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
44585 \begin_layout Standard
44586 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44610 \begin_layout Standard
44612 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
44615 to the navigate menu section in the .inc-file to have the sixth bookmark.
44618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44622 \begin_layout Standard
44625 Enable tool tips in main work area
44627 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
44631 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44635 \begin_layout Standard
44639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44646 restoring of window layout and geometries
44648 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
44649 in the last LyX session.
44652 \begin_layout Standard
44655 Restore cursor positions
44657 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it has been the last
44661 \begin_layout Standard
44664 Load opened files from last session
44666 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
44669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44673 name "sub:Backup documents"
44678 \begin_inset Index idx
44681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44690 \begin_layout Standard
44695 is set, you can specify the time between backup saves.
44698 \begin_layout Standard
44703 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
44706 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44716 \begin_layout Standard
44719 Open documents in tabs
44721 is not used, then every file will be opened in its own new instance of
44725 \begin_layout Subsection
44727 \begin_inset Index idx
44730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44739 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
44746 \begin_layout Standard
44747 These fonts are used to display your documents on the screen.
44750 \begin_layout Standard
44751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44759 This section only deals with the fonts
44764 The fonts that appear on the output are independent from these fonts, and
44767 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44768 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44779 \begin_layout Standard
44780 By default, LyX uses
44784 as roman (serif) font,
44792 (depends on the system) as
44795 \begin_inset space ~
44811 \begin_layout Standard
44812 You can change the font size with the
44817 You can also change the font zoom outside the preferences dialog for the
44818 current LyX session by pressing
44822 and scrolling the mouse wheel.
44825 \begin_layout Standard
44830 is the screen resolution in dpi (dots per inch).
44831 The Font Sizes are calculated as letter height in units of points.
44833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44836 points have the size of 1
44837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44841 \begin_inset space ~
44845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44847 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
44854 \begin_layout Standard
44859 are the same as if a document font size of 10
44860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44864 The sizes are explained in detail in section
44865 \begin_inset space ~
44869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44871 reference "sub:Document-Font"
44878 \begin_layout Standard
44881 Use Pixmap Cache to speed up font rendering
44883 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
44884 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44885 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44886 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44888 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44889 \begin_inset space ~
44895 \begin_layout Subsection
44897 \begin_inset Index idx
44900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44907 \begin_inset Index idx
44910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44919 \begin_layout Standard
44920 You can here change all the colors used by LyX.
44921 Choose an item in the list and use the
44928 \begin_layout Subsection
44930 \begin_inset Index idx
44933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44942 \begin_layout Standard
44943 Here you can specify if graphics inside LyX are displayed.
44946 \begin_layout Standard
44951 enables previewing snippets of your document.
44952 This feature is described in section
44953 \begin_inset space ~
44957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44959 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44966 \begin_layout Standard
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44974 \begin_inset space ~
44978 \begin_inset space ~
44983 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
44986 \begin_layout Section
44988 \begin_inset Index idx
44991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45000 \begin_layout Subsection
45004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45008 \begin_layout Standard
45011 Cursor follows scrollbar
45013 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
45017 \begin_layout Standard
45020 Sort environments alphabetically
45022 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45025 \begin_layout Standard
45028 Group environments by their category
45030 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
45033 \begin_layout Standard
45034 The math macro editing option determines the editing style, see the section
45046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45050 \begin_layout Standard
45051 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
45056 specifies the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
45057 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen, the text appears
45061 \begin_layout Subsection
45063 \begin_inset Index idx
45066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45073 \begin_inset Index idx
45076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45077 Settings ! Shortcuts
45085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45089 \begin_layout Standard
45090 Bindings are used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
45091 Several binding files are available:
45094 \begin_layout Description
45095 cua.bind typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
45098 \begin_layout Description
45099 (x)emacs.bind set of bindings like they are used in the editor programs
45110 \begin_layout Description
45111 mac.bind set of bindings for
45114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45122 \begin_layout Standard
45123 There are also bind-files designed for special document classes, like
45127 , and bind files for special languages.
45128 The name of language bind-files begin with a language code, e.
45129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45133 \begin_inset space \space{}
45137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45145 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
45149 \begin_layout Standard
45150 Some bind-files, like
45154 , have only a small scope.
45155 When looking at the end of the file
45159 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
45162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45166 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
45171 \begin_inset Index idx
45174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45175 Key Bindings ! Editing
45183 \begin_layout Standard
45184 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
45185 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
45186 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
45189 Show key-bindings containing
45192 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
45193 Insert there for example as keyword
45194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45201 and you get the 4 different existing shortcuts for the 3 different functions
45203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45211 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
45212 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
45216 that you will find in the
45223 \begin_layout Standard
45225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45229 \begin_inset space \space{}
45240 , select the function and press the
45245 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
45246 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
45247 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
45248 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by modifying an existing
45249 binding and adding the different function names as a semicolon separated
45251 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
45253 The binding for the function
45257 is an example of this.
45260 \begin_layout Standard
45261 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying bind-files with a
45263 The syntax of the entries is:
45266 \begin_layout Standard
45272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45290 \begin_layout Subsection
45292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45294 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
45299 \begin_inset Index idx
45302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45309 \begin_inset Index idx
45312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45313 Settings ! Keyboard Map
45321 \begin_layout Standard
45322 Normally keyboard settings have to be done in a menu of your operating system.
45323 For the case that this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
45325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45329 \begin_inset space \space{}
45332 a Czech keyboard but want to write with it like with a Romanian one, you
45333 can use the keyboard map file named
45340 \begin_layout Standard
45341 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45349 Keyboard maps are only provided as makeshift and don't work on all systems.
45357 \begin_layout Standard
45358 Besides this, you can specify here the
45360 Wheel scrolling speed
45363 The standard value is 1.0, higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
45367 \begin_layout Subsection
45369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45371 name "sub:Input-Completion-Appendix"
45376 \begin_inset Index idx
45379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45388 \begin_layout Standard
45389 Input completion is described in sec.
45390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45396 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
45401 The completion options for math do the same as the corresponding options
45403 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
45404 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated or
45408 \begin_layout Section
45410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45417 \begin_inset Index idx
45420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45427 \begin_inset Index idx
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45439 \begin_layout Description
45441 \begin_inset space ~
45444 directory This is LyX's working directory.
45445 It is the default when you
45456 \begin_inset space ~
45464 \begin_layout Description
45466 \begin_inset space ~
45469 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
45471 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45473 \begin_inset space ~
45477 \begin_inset space ~
45485 \begin_layout Description
45487 \begin_inset space ~
45490 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
45496 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45500 \begin_inset Newline newline
45504 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45516 button does not exist when using LyX on MacOS and Windows systems.
45524 \begin_layout Description
45526 \begin_inset space ~
45530 \begin_inset Index idx
45533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45539 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
45540 When no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
45541 \begin_inset space ~
45545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45547 reference "sub:Backup documents"
45555 will be used to save the backups.
45556 \begin_inset Newline newline
45559 The backup files have the ending
45560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45570 \begin_layout Description
45575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 XServer-Pipe Here you can enter the name of a Unix-pipe.
45583 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
45584 \begin_inset Newline newline
45591 : You add a BibTeX-database test.bib to your document.
45592 You can edit this file with the program
45601 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
45604 \begin_inset space ~
45610 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
45615 and click on the LyX-symbol.
45616 The entry will now be inserted as citation at the current cursor position
45622 and LyX need of course to be run the same time.
45623 \begin_inset Newline newline
45627 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45635 This feature doesn't work on Windows systems.
45643 \begin_layout Description
45645 \begin_inset space ~
45648 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
45651 \begin_layout Description
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45656 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
45657 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list where
45658 to find it on the system.
45659 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
45660 is configured, so that you normally don't have to modify it.
45662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45669 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
45670 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
45674 \begin_layout Section
45678 \begin_layout Standard
45679 Here you can insert your name and email address.
45680 The identity will be used when you have enabled change tracking as described
45682 \begin_inset space ~
45686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45688 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45692 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45695 \begin_layout Section
45697 \begin_inset Index idx
45700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 Language ! Settings
45707 \begin_inset Index idx
45710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45711 Settings ! Language
45719 \begin_layout Subsection
45721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45723 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
45730 \begin_layout Description
45732 \begin_inset space ~
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45739 language Here you can select the language of LyX's menus.
45740 Unfortunately this doesn't work on Mac and Windows.
45741 It works on Linux for the languages into LyX's menus and dialogs are translated.
45742 You find the actual translation status here:
45743 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45745 name "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45746 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45753 \begin_layout Description
45755 \begin_inset space ~
45758 language is the language used in new documents
45761 \begin_layout Description
45763 \begin_inset space ~
45766 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
45768 Language issues which are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
45769 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
45770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45786 The most widespread language package is
45791 \begin_inset Index idx
45794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45795 LaTeX-packages ! babel
45800 , it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
45801 However, more recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come
45802 with the alternative language package
45807 \begin_inset Index idx
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45811 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
45816 that is more suited for the multi-script support of these engines.
45817 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
45819 The available selections are described in sec.
45820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45826 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
45833 \begin_layout Description
45835 \begin_inset space ~
45839 \begin_inset space ~
45842 Point Define the default decimal point for the use in tables (decimal point
45846 \begin_layout Description
45848 \begin_inset space ~
45851 start When a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
45852 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
45853 An example is the start command
45859 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45864 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45879 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45884 \begin_layout Description
45886 \begin_inset space ~
45894 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45895 command toggles the package on and off.
45898 \begin_layout Description
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45904 \begin_inset space ~
45907 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45908 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45909 used by all LaTeX-packages.
45910 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45917 \begin_layout Description
45919 \begin_inset space ~
45922 begin When this option is set, the documents starts with the chosen document
45924 When this option is not set, the
45927 \begin_inset space ~
45932 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
45933 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45936 \begin_inset space ~
45944 \begin_layout Description
45946 \begin_inset space ~
45952 \begin_inset space ~
45958 When it is not set, the
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45966 is set to the end of the document.
45969 \begin_layout Description
45971 \begin_inset space ~
45975 \begin_inset space ~
45978 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45979 language will be underlined blue.
45982 \begin_layout Description
45984 \begin_inset space ~
45988 \begin_inset space ~
45991 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45992 like Arabic, Hebrew, Farsi.
45995 \begin_layout Description
45997 \begin_inset space ~
46000 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
46001 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
46002 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
46003 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
46006 \begin_layout Subsection
46010 \begin_layout Standard
46011 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
46012 \begin_inset space ~
46016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46018 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
46025 \begin_layout Section
46029 \begin_layout Subsection
46031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46038 \begin_inset Index idx
46041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46048 \begin_inset Index idx
46051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46060 \begin_layout Description
46062 \begin_inset space ~
46065 printer Here you can specify the name of your default printer.
46066 The name will be used when the
46071 \begin_inset Newline newline
46075 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
46091 \begin_layout Description
46093 \begin_inset space ~
46096 command is the command LyX
46097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46104 LaTeX uses for printing.
46105 The default is on most systems
46112 \begin_layout Description
46114 \begin_inset space ~
46118 \begin_inset space ~
46121 Options Here you can specify printer options.
46122 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
46123 of the program that provides the
46130 \begin_layout Description
46132 \begin_inset space ~
46136 \begin_inset space ~
46140 \begin_inset space ~
46143 printer This option works only for the
46148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46160 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
46161 This is an option only for dvips experts.
46164 \begin_layout Subsection
46166 \begin_inset Index idx
46169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46176 \begin_inset Index idx
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46180 Settings ! Date format
46188 \begin_layout Standard
46189 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
46190 \begin_inset Newline newline
46194 \begin_inset Flex URL
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46199 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
46205 \begin_inset Newline newline
46208 For example the format
46209 \begin_inset Newline newline
46213 \begin_inset Newline newline
46216 prints the date as day/month/year.
46219 \begin_layout Subsection
46223 \begin_layout Description
46225 \begin_inset space ~
46229 \begin_inset space ~
46232 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
46235 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
46236 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
46238 \begin_inset space ~
46244 Setting the line line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless
46248 \begin_layout Description
46250 \begin_inset space ~
46253 command defines an additional command used to produce better ASCII tables
46258 UNIX-commands (refer to their manuals for more information about them).
46259 Setting this as empty tells LyX to use the internal formatter.
46262 \begin_layout Subsection
46267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46277 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
46282 \begin_inset Index idx
46285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46294 \begin_layout Description
46299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46307 \begin_inset space ~
46310 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
46315 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
46337 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
46338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46350 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
46351 LyX sets up in the background.
46352 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
46355 \begin_layout Description
46357 \begin_inset space ~
46361 \begin_inset space ~
46364 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
46369 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
46372 \begin_layout Standard
46373 You can also specify here commands with parameters for the listed applications.
46374 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
46375 manuals of the applications.
46376 Currently the following commands can be set:
46379 \begin_layout Description
46384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46392 \begin_inset space ~
46395 command Command for the program
46399 that is described in the section
46405 Additional Features
46410 \begin_layout Description
46415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46423 \begin_inset space ~
46426 command Command for the program
46430 that generates the bibliography, see section
46431 \begin_inset space ~
46435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46437 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
46444 \begin_layout Description
46446 \begin_inset space ~
46449 command Command for the program that generates the index, see section
46450 \begin_inset space ~
46454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46456 reference "sub:Index-Program"
46463 \begin_layout Description
46465 \begin_inset space ~
46468 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
46469 \begin_inset space ~
46473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46475 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
46482 \begin_layout Description
46484 \begin_inset space ~
46488 \begin_inset space ~
46492 \begin_inset space ~
46496 \begin_inset space ~
46499 options They only have an effect when the program
46503 is used as DVI-viewer.
46506 \begin_layout Standard
46507 There are additionally the following options:
46510 \begin_layout Description
46512 \begin_inset space ~
46516 \begin_inset space ~
46520 \begin_inset space ~
46524 \begin_inset space ~
46528 \begin_inset space ~
46531 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
46532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46549 to separate folders.
46550 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
46551 \begin_inset Index idx
46554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46561 \begin_inset Index idx
46564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46573 \begin_layout Description
46575 \begin_inset space ~
46579 \begin_inset space ~
46583 \begin_inset space ~
46587 \begin_inset space ~
46591 \begin_inset space ~
46595 \begin_inset space ~
46598 changes Removes all manually set document class options in the
46600 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
46603 dialog when changing the document class.
46606 \begin_layout Section
46608 \begin_inset space ~
46612 \begin_inset Index idx
46615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46624 \begin_layout Subsection
46626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46628 name "sub:Converters"
46633 \begin_inset Index idx
46636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46645 \begin_layout Standard
46646 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
46647 from one format to another.
46648 You can modify them or create new ones.
46649 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the field
46656 \begin_inset space ~
46666 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
46670 \begin_inset space ~
46675 drop-down list, modify the
46679 field, and press the
46686 \begin_layout Standard
46689 Converter File Cache
46691 is enabled, conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
46694 Maximum Age (in days
46697 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
46698 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
46701 \begin_layout Standard
46702 More about converters, like the variables and flags that can be used in
46703 the converter definition, is described in the section
46714 \begin_layout Subsection
46716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46718 name "sec:File-Formats"
46723 \begin_inset Index idx
46726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46733 \begin_inset Index idx
46736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46745 \begin_layout Standard
46746 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
46747 You can modify the viewer and editor program that should be used for certain
46751 \begin_layout Standard
46752 More about formats, like the options that can be used in the format definition,
46753 is described in the section
46764 \begin_layout Standard
46765 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
46766 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
46767 to the temporary directory in order that the conversion may be performed.
46768 This is done by specifying a
46773 More about this is described in the section
46784 \begin_layout Chapter
46785 Units available in LyX
46786 \begin_inset Index idx
46789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46798 name "cha:Units-available-in"
46805 \begin_layout Standard
46806 To understand the units described in this documentation,
46807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46809 reference "cap:Units"
46813 explains all units available in LyX.
46816 \begin_layout Standard
46817 \begin_inset Float table
46823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46824 \begin_inset Caption Standard
46826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46842 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46850 \begin_inset Tabular
46851 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
46852 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
46853 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46854 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47005 scaled point (65536
47006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47066 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
47070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47121 % of original image width
47128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
47299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
47308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47335 \begin_layout Chapter
47337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47346 \begin_layout Standard
47347 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
47348 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
47351 \begin_layout Itemize
47354 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
47357 \begin_layout Itemize
47363 \begin_layout Itemize
47369 \begin_layout Itemize
47375 \begin_layout Itemize
47381 \begin_layout Itemize
47387 \begin_layout Itemize
47393 \begin_layout Itemize
47399 \begin_layout Itemize
47402 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
47405 \begin_layout Itemize
47411 \begin_layout Itemize
47417 \begin_layout Itemize
47423 \begin_layout Itemize
47429 \begin_layout Itemize
47435 \begin_layout Itemize
47441 \begin_layout Itemize
47447 \begin_layout Itemize
47453 \begin_layout Itemize
47455 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47464 \begin_layout Standard
47465 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47468 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
47475 \begin_layout Bibliography
47476 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47477 LatexCommand bibitem
47484 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47487 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
47492 \begin_inset Newline newline
47496 \begin_inset Flex URL
47499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47501 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
47509 \begin_layout Bibliography
47510 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47511 LatexCommand bibitem
47512 key "latexcompanion"
47516 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
47518 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
47521 Addison-Wesley, 2004
47524 \begin_layout Bibliography
47525 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47526 LatexCommand bibitem
47531 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
47534 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
47537 Addison-Wesley, 2003
47540 \begin_layout Bibliography
47541 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47542 LatexCommand bibitem
47549 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
47552 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
47555 \begin_layout Bibliography
47556 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47557 LatexCommand bibitem
47569 Addison-Wesley, 1984
47572 \begin_layout Bibliography
47573 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47574 LatexCommand bibitem
47580 \begin_inset Newline newline
47584 \begin_inset Flex URL
47587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47589 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
47597 \begin_layout Bibliography
47598 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47599 LatexCommand bibitem
47605 \begin_inset Newline newline
47609 \begin_inset Flex URL
47612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47614 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
47622 \begin_layout Bibliography
47623 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47624 LatexCommand bibitem
47630 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47632 name "Documentation"
47633 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
47642 \begin_inset Newline newline
47646 \begin_inset Flex URL
47649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47651 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
47659 \begin_layout Bibliography
47660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47661 LatexCommand bibitem
47667 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47669 name "Documentation"
47670 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
47674 how to use the program
47679 \begin_inset Newline newline
47683 \begin_inset Flex URL
47686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47688 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47696 \begin_layout Bibliography
47697 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47698 LatexCommand bibitem
47704 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47706 name "Documentation"
47707 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47716 \begin_inset Newline newline
47720 \begin_inset Flex URL
47723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47725 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47733 \begin_layout Bibliography
47734 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47735 LatexCommand bibitem
47741 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47743 name "Documentation"
47744 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47753 \begin_inset Newline newline
47757 \begin_inset Flex URL
47760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47762 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47770 \begin_layout Bibliography
47771 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47772 LatexCommand bibitem
47778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47780 name "Documentation"
47781 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47785 of the LaTeX-package
47790 \begin_inset Index idx
47793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47794 LaTeX-packages ! caption
47800 \begin_inset Newline newline
47804 \begin_inset Flex URL
47807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47809 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47817 \begin_layout Bibliography
47818 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47819 LatexCommand bibitem
47825 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47827 name "Documentation"
47828 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47832 of the LaTeX-package
47837 \begin_inset Index idx
47840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47841 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
47847 \begin_inset Newline newline
47851 \begin_inset Flex URL
47854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47856 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47864 \begin_layout Bibliography
47865 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47866 LatexCommand bibitem
47872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47874 name "Documentation"
47875 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf"
47879 of the LaTeX-package
47884 \begin_inset Index idx
47887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47888 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
47894 \begin_inset Newline newline
47898 \begin_inset Flex URL
47901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47903 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/hyperref.pdf
47911 \begin_layout Bibliography
47912 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47913 LatexCommand bibitem
47919 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47921 name "Documentation"
47922 target "ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47926 of the LaTeX-package
47931 \begin_inset Index idx
47934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47935 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
47941 \begin_inset Newline newline
47945 \begin_inset Flex URL
47948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47950 ftp://tug.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47958 \begin_layout Bibliography
47959 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47960 LatexCommand bibitem
47966 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47968 name "Documentation"
47969 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47973 of the LaTeX-package
47978 \begin_inset Index idx
47981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47982 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
47988 \begin_inset Newline newline
47992 \begin_inset Flex URL
47995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47997 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
48005 \begin_layout Bibliography
48006 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48007 LatexCommand bibitem
48013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48015 name "Documentation"
48016 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
48020 of the LaTeX-package
48025 \begin_inset Index idx
48028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48029 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
48035 \begin_inset Newline newline
48039 \begin_inset Flex URL
48042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48044 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
48052 \begin_layout Bibliography
48053 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48054 LatexCommand bibitem
48060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48062 name "Documentation"
48063 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf"
48067 of the LaTeX-package
48072 \begin_inset Index idx
48075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48076 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
48082 \begin_inset Newline newline
48086 \begin_inset Flex URL
48089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48091 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf
48099 \begin_layout Bibliography
48100 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48101 LatexCommand bibitem
48107 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48110 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/XeTeX"
48114 how to use LyX with XeTeX:
48115 \begin_inset Newline newline
48119 \begin_inset Flex URL
48122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48124 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/XeTeX
48132 \begin_layout Bibliography
48133 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48134 LatexCommand bibitem
48140 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48143 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
48147 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
48148 \begin_inset Newline newline
48152 \begin_inset Flex URL
48155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48157 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
48165 \begin_layout Bibliography
48166 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48167 LatexCommand bibitem
48173 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48176 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
48180 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
48181 \begin_inset Newline newline
48185 \begin_inset Flex URL
48188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48190 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
48198 \begin_layout Bibliography
48199 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48200 LatexCommand bibitem
48206 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48209 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
48213 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
48214 \begin_inset Newline newline
48218 \begin_inset Flex URL
48221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48223 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
48231 \begin_layout Bibliography
48232 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48233 LatexCommand bibitem
48239 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48242 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
48246 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
48247 \begin_inset Newline newline
48251 \begin_inset Flex URL
48254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48256 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
48264 \begin_layout Bibliography
48265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48266 LatexCommand bibitem
48272 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48275 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
48279 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
48280 \begin_inset Newline newline
48284 \begin_inset Flex URL
48287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48289 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
48297 \begin_layout Bibliography
48298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48299 LatexCommand bibitem
48305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48308 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
48312 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
48313 \begin_inset Newline newline
48317 \begin_inset Flex URL
48320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48322 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
48330 \begin_layout Bibliography
48331 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48332 LatexCommand bibitem
48338 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48341 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
48345 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
48346 \begin_inset Newline newline
48350 \begin_inset Flex URL
48353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48355 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
48363 \begin_layout Bibliography
48364 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48365 LatexCommand bibitem
48371 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48374 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
48378 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
48379 \begin_inset Newline newline
48383 \begin_inset Flex URL
48386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48388 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
48396 \begin_layout Bibliography
48397 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48398 LatexCommand bibitem
48404 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48407 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
48411 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
48412 \begin_inset Newline newline
48416 \begin_inset Flex URL
48419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48421 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
48429 \begin_layout Bibliography
48430 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48431 LatexCommand bibitem
48437 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48440 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
48444 about new features in
48449 \begin_inset Newline newline
48453 \begin_inset Flex URL
48456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48458 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
48466 \begin_layout Standard
48467 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48501 \begin_inset Note Note
48504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48511 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
48512 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
48513 bibliography is the second one:
48521 \begin_layout Standard
48522 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
48523 LatexCommand bibtex
48524 bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs"
48525 options "../biblio/alphadin"
48532 \begin_layout Standard
48533 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
48536 \begin_layout Standard
48537 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
48538 LatexCommand printnomenclature
48544 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
48545 LatexCommand printindex